View source for CP-201000212, FSAR A103 - Figures - Technical Requirements Manual (TRM)

{{Adams
| number = ML101170370
| issue date = 02/15/2010
| title = FSAR A103 - Figures - Technical Requirements Manual (TRM)
| author name = 
| author affiliation = Luminant Generation Co, LLC, Luminant Power
| addressee name = 
| addressee affiliation = NRC/NRR
| docket = 05000445, 05000446
| license number = 
| contact person = 
| case reference number = CP-201000212, TXX-10029
| document type = Manual, Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR)
| page count = 268
}}

=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM)
FOR COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 AND 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS 11.0   USE AND APPLICATION ............................................................................11.0-1 11.1      Definitions...............................................................................................11.0-1 11.2      Logical Connectors.................................................................................11.0-1 11.3      Completion Times ..................................................................................11.0-1 11.4      Frequency ..............................................................................................11.0-1 13.0  TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT APPLICABILITY ..........................................................................................13.0-1 13.1      REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .....................................................13.1-1 TR 13.1.31   Boration Injection System - Operating..............................................13.1-1 TR 13.1.32   Boration Injection System - Shutdown .............................................13.1-3 TR 13.1.33   Not Used ..........................................................................................13.1-5 TR 13.1.34   Not Used ..........................................................................................13.1-5 TR 13.1.35   Not Used ..........................................................................................13.1-5 TR 13.1.36   Not Used ..........................................................................................13.1-5 TR 13.1.37   Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator .................13.1-6 TR 13.1.38   Control Bank Insertion Limits ...........................................................13.1-8 TR 13.1.39   Rod Position Indication - Shutdown .................................................13.1-9 13.2      POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS...........................................................13.2-1 TR 13.2.31   Moveable Incore Detection System..................................................13.2-1 TR 13.2.32   Axial Flux Difference (AFD) ..............................................................13.2-3 TR 13.2.33   Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (QPTR) Alarm ........................................13.2-5 TR 13.2.34   Power Distribution Monitoring System .............................................13.2-6 13.3      INSTRUMENTATION.............................................................................13.3-1 TR 13.3.1    Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Times ........13.3-1 TR 13.3.2    Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)
Instrumentation Response Times...............................................13.3-4 TR 13.3.5    Loss of Power (LOP) Diesel Generator (DG) Start Instrumentation Response Times...............................................13.3-11 TR 13.3.31   Seismic Instrumentation ...................................................................13.3-13 TR 13.3.32   Source Range Neutron Flux .............................................................13.3-15 TR 13.3.33   Turbine Overspeed Protection .........................................................13.3-17 TR 13.3.34   Plant Calorimetric Measurement ......................................................13.3-21 13.4      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (RCS).................................................13.4-1 TR 13.4.14   RCS Pressure Isolation Valves ........................................................13.4-1 TR 13.4.31   Loose Part Detection System ...........................................................13.4-2 TR 13.4.33   Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Chemistry ......................................13.4-3 TR 13.4.34   Pressurizer .......................................................................................13.4-7 TR 13.4.35   Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Vent Specification..........................13.4-9 (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                    i                                                       Revision 70

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued) 13.5      EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)............................13.5-1 TR 13.5.31   ECCS - Containment Debris ............................................................13.5-1 TR 13.5.32   ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates ........................................................13.5-3 13.6      CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS...................................................................13.6-1 TR 13.6.3    Containment Isolation Valves ...........................................................13.6-1 TR 13.6.6    Containment Spray System..............................................................13.6-14 TR 13.6.7    Spray Additive System .....................................................................13.6-15 13.7      PLANT SYSTEMS..................................................................................13.7-1 TR 13.7.31   Steam Generator Atmospheric Relief Valve (ARV) -
Air Accumulator Tank .................................................................13.7-1 TR 13.7.32   Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation ......................13.7-2 TR 13.7.33   Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and Safe Shutdown Impoundment (SSI) Dam............................................................13.7-4 TR 13.7.34   Flood Protection ...............................................................................13.7-5 TR 13.7.35   Snubbers ..........................................................................................13.7-8 TR 13.7.36   Area Temperature Monitoring ..........................................................13.7-10 TR 13.7.37   Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units..........................................................13.7-13 TR 13.7.38   Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit........13.7-14 TR 13.7.39   Tornado Missile Shields ...................................................................13.7-16 TR 13.7.41   Condensate Storage Tank (CST) Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves...................................................................13.7-26 13.8      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ........................................................13.8-1 TR 13.8.31   AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements) ................................13.8-1 TR 13.8.32   Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices......................................................................13.8-3 13.9      REFUELING OPERATIONS ..................................................................13.9-1 TR 13.9.31   Decay Time ......................................................................................13.9-1 TR 13.9.32   Refueling Operations / Communications ..........................................13.9-2 TR 13.9.33   Refueling Machine............................................................................13.9-3 TR 13.9.34   Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas......................13.9-5 TR 13.9.35   Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods .....................................13.9-6 TR 13.9.36   Fuel Storage Area Water Level ........................................................13.9-7 13.10     EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM ....................................................................13.10-1 TR 13.10.31 Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation .......................................13.10-1 TR 13.10.32 Gas Storage Tanks ..........................................................................13.10-5 TR 13.10.33 Liquid Holdup Tanks.........................................................................13.10-7 TR 13.10.34 Explosive Gas Mixture......................................................................13.10-9 15.0   ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS ..................................................................15.0-1 15.5      Programs and Manuals ..........................................................................15.0-1 TR 15.5.17   TRM - Administrative Control Process .............................................15.0-1 TR 15.5.31   Snubber Augmented Inservice Inspection Program .........................15.0-2 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                               ii                                                       Revision 70

Use and Application TR 11.0 11.0 USE AND APPLICATION
                                                          - NOTE -
For the purpose of the Technical Requirements, the Technical Requirements Manual terms specified below should be considered synonymous with the listed Technical Specification terms:
Technical Requirement                             Technical Specifications Technical Requirement (TR)                      Technical Specifications (TS) or Specification(s)
Technical Requirement Surveillance                   Surveillance Requirement (SR)
(TRS) 11.1      Definitions The definitions contained in the Technical Specifications Section 1.1, Definitions apply to the Technical Requirements contained in this manual.
11.2      Logical Connectors The guidance provided for the use and application of logical connectors in Section 1.2, Logical Connectors of the Technical Specifications is applicable to the Technical Requirements contained in this manual.
11.3      Completion Times The guidance provided for the use and application of Completion Times in Section 1.3, Completion Times of the Technical Specifications is applicable to the Technical Requirements contained in this manual.
11.4      Frequency The guidance provided for the use and application of Frequency Requirements in Section 1.4, Frequency of the Technical Specifications is applicable to the Technical Requirements contained in this manual.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 11.0-1                                              Revision 56

TR Applicability TR 13.0 13.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT APPLICABILITY The guidance provided for the use and application of LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION (LCO) APPLICABILITY in Section 3.0, LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION (LCO)
APPLICABILITY of the Technical Specifications is applicable to the Technical Requirements contained in this manual, except as noted below.
The guidance provided for the use and application of SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENT (SR)
APPLICABILITY in Section 3.0, SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENT (SR) APPLICABILITY of the Technical Specifications is applicable to the Technical Requirements Surveillance (TRS) contained in this manual.
A cross reference between Section 13.0 of the Technical Requirements Manual and Section 3.0 of the Technical Specifications is as follows:
Technical Requirement Section          Technical Specification Section TR LCO 13.0.1                          LCO 3.0.1 TR LCO 13.0.2                          LCO 3.0.2 N/A (See Note 1 below)                 LCO 3.0.3 TR LCO 13.0.4                          LCO 3.0.4 TR LCO 13.0.5                          LCO 3.0.5 N/A (See Note 2 below)                 LCO 3.0.6 TR LCO 13.0.7                          LCO 3.0.7 TRS 13.0.1                             SR 3.0.1 TRS 13.0.2                             SR 3.0.2 TRS 13.0.3                             SR 3.0.3 TRS 13.0.4                             SR 3.0.4 (continued)
CPSES- UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.0-1                                Revision 56

TR Applicability TR 13.0 13.0 TR APPLICABILITY (continued)
                                                         - NOTES -
: 1. As part of the conversion to the Improved Technical Specifications in July 1999, certain Technical Specifications were relocated to the Improved Technical Requirements Manual.
The shutdown requirements (similar to TS LCO 3.0.3) for each Technical Requirement are in three categories: (1) remains with the parent Technical Specification by direct reference to the Technical Specifications, (2) relocated by incorporation into the individual Technical Requirements (i.e. additional conditions were added), or (3) not applicable (i.e. all possible conditions were addressed within the TR LCO). Therefore, the TRM has no corresponding LCO 3.0.3 similar to the TS LCO 3.0.3.
When a Required Action and Completion Time is not met and no associated Required Action is provided, the condition will be documented in the corrective action program.
: 2. Technical Specification LCO 3.0.6 provides entry into the Safety Function Determination Program (SFDP). The SFDP is not directly applied to the Technical Requirements Manual.
However, TRM requirements may result in inoperable items which either support a parent Technical Specification (e.g. TR 13.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Times) or provide directions to declare the associated item inoperable and enter the applicable Technical Specification (e.g. TR 13.7.31, Steam Generator Atmospheric Relief Valve (ARV) - Air Accumulator Tank).
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.0-2                                              Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Operating TR 13.1.31 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TR 13.1.31 Boration Injection System - Operating TR LCO 13.1.31      Two boration injection subsystems shall be OPERABLE:
                                                               - NOTES -
: 1. TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable for entry into MODES 3 and 4 for the charging pump declared inoperable pursuant to TS 3.4.12 provided the charging pump is restored to OPERABLE status within 4 hours after entering MODE 3 or prior to the temperature of one or more of the RCS cold legs exceeding 375&deg;F, whichever comes first.
: 2. In MODE 4 the positive displacement pump may be used in lieu of one of the required centrifugal charging pumps.
APPLICABILITY:      MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 ACTIONS CONDITION                            REQUIRED ACTION                            COMPLETION TIME A. One boration injection          A.1 Restore boration injection                      72 hours subsystem inoperable                  subsystem to OPERABLE status.
(except due to required charging pump inoperable).
B. One charging pump               B.1 Restore charging pump to                        7 days inoperable.                           OPERABLE status.
C. Two boration injection          C.1 Initiate action to restore at least Immediately subsystems inoperable.                one boration injection subsystem to OPERABLE status.
OR AND Required Actions and associated Completion           C.2 Initiate Engineering Evaluation to Immediately Times not met.                        identify compensatory actions to be completed in a timely manner.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                         13.1-1                                              Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Operating TR 13.1.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                         FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.31.1   Verify that the temperature of the flow path from the       7 days required boric acid storage tanks (including the tank solution temperature) is greater than or equal to 65&deg;F.
TRS 13.1.31.2   Verify the boron concentration of the required boric acid 7 days storage tank has a minimum boron concentration of 7000 ppm.
TRS 13.1.31.3   Verify a minimum indicated borated water level of 50% 7 days of the required boric acid storage tank.
TRS 13.1.31.4   Verify that each valve (manual, power-operated, or          31 days automatic) in the required flow path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, is in its correct position.
TRS 13.1.31.5   Verify that the flow path from the boric acid tanks         18 months delivers at least 30 gpm to the RCS.
TRS 13.1.31.6   Demonstrate the required centrifugal charging pump(s) In accordance with OPERABLE by testing in accordance with the Inservice the Inservice Testing Plan.                                               Testing Plan TRS 13.1.31.7   Demonstrate the required positive displacement              In accordance with charging pump OPERABLE by performing TRS                    TRS 13.1.31.5 13.1.31.5.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.1-2                                   Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TR 13.1.32 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TR 13.1.32 Boration Injection System - Shutdown TR LCO 13.1.32              One boration injection subsystem shall be OPERABLE and capable of being powered from an OPERABLE emergency power source.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 5 and 6 ACTIONS CONDITION                                  REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Required boration injection A.1 Suspend all operations involving Immediately subsystem inoperable.                       positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of required OR                                          SDM or boron concentration.
Required boration injection subsystem not capable of being powered from an OPERABLE emergency power source.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                                         - NOTES -
: 1. TRS 13.1.32.2, TRS 13.1.32.3, TRS 13.1.32.4, and TRS 13.1.32.5 are only required to be met when the boric acid storage tank is the required borated water source.
: 2. TRS 13.1.32.1, TRS 13.1.32.6, and TRS 13.1.32.7 are only required to be met when the RWST is the required borated water source.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.1-3                                              Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TR 13.1.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                                    FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.32.1   -------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            - NOTE -
Only required to be performed if the outside temperature is less than 40&deg;F.
Verify the RWST has a minimum solution temperature                        24 hours of 40&deg;F.
TRS 13.1.32.2   Verify that the temperature of the flow path and boric                    7 days acid storage tank solution temperature is greater than or equal to 65&deg;F.
TRS 13.1.32.3   Verify the boron concentration of the boric acid storage 7 days tank has a minimum boron concentration of 7000 ppm.
TRS 13.1.32.4   Verify a minimum indicated borated water level of 10% 7 days when using the boric acid pump from the boric acid storage tank.
TRS 13.1.32.5   Verify a minimum indicated borated water level of 20% 7 days when using gravity feed from the boric acid storage tank.
TRS 13.1.32.6   Verify the boron concentration of the RWST has a                          7 days minimum boron concentration of 2400 ppm.
TRS 13.1.32.7   Verify a minimum indicated borated water level of 24% 7 days when using the RWST.
TRS 13.1.32.8   For the required flow path, verify that each valve                        31 days (manual, power-operated, or automatic) in the flow path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, is in its correct position.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.1-4                                          Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TR 13.1.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.32.9   Demonstrate the required positive displacement           18 months charging pump is OPERABLE by verifying that the flow path from the boric acid storage tanks via a boric acid transfer pump or gravity feed connection to the Reactor Coolant System is capable of delivering at least 30 gpm to the RCS.
TRS 13.1.32.10 Demonstrate the required centrifugal charging pump is In accordance with OPERABLE by verifying, on recirculation flow, that a     the Inservice differential pressure across the pump of greater than or Testing Program equal to 2370 psid is developed.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                13.1-5                                 Revision 56

Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator TR 13.1.37 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TR 13.1.37 Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator TR LCO 13.1.37        The Rod Position Deviation Monitor shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:        MODES 1 and 2.
ACTIONS CONDITION                              REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more rods not within A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately alignment limits.                       of TS 3.1.4 B. One or more rod position          B.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately indications inoperable.                 of TS 3.1.7 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.37.1      --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when the rod position deviation monitor is discovered to be inoperable.
Verify individual rod positions to be within alignment                     4 hours limit per Technical Specification SR 3.1.4.1.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.1-6                                          Revision 56

Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator TR 13.1.37 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.37.2   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when the rod position deviation monitor is discovered to be inoperable.
Verify the OPERABILITY of the Demand Position                              4 hours Indication System and the Digital Rod Position Indication System (DPRI) while performing TRS 13.1.37.1 by verifying that the Demand Position Indication System and the DRPI, for each rod, agrees within 12 steps.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.1-7                                          Revision 56

Control Bank Insertion Limits TR 13.1.38 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TR 13.1.38 Control Bank Insertion Limits TR LCO 13.1.38       The Control Bank Insertion Limit Monitor shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:       MODE 1, MODE 2 with keff t 1.0 ACTIONS CONDITION                             REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Control bank insertion limits A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately not met.                               of TS 3.1.6.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                   FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.38.1     --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when the rod insertion limit monitor is discovered to be inoperable.
Verify the position of each control bank to be within the 4 hours insertion limit by verifying the individual rod positions per Technical Specification SR 3.1.6.2.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.1-8                                       Revision 56

Rod Position Indication - Shutdown TR 13.1.39 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TR 13.1.39 Rod Position Indication - Shutdown TR LCO 13.1.39       One digital rod position indicator (DRPI), excluding demand position indication, shall be OPERABLE for each shutdown or control rod not fully inserted.
APPLICABILITY:       MODES 3, 4 and 5
                                                                - NOTES -
: 1. This TR LCO is not applicable if the Rod Control System is incapable of rod withdrawal.
: 2. This TR LCO is not applicable if Keff is maintained less than or equal to 0.95, and no more than one shutdown or control bank is withdrawn from the fully inserted position.
: 3. The DRPI System may be de-energized to collect rod drop time data in accordance with SR 3.1.4.3 provided no more than one shutdown or control bank is withdrawn from the fully inserted position and the DRPI System is available during the withdrawal of the shutdown or control bank.
ACTIONS CONDITION                             REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Less than the above              A.1 Place the Rod Control System in Immediately required rod position                  a condition incapable of rod indicator(s) OPERABLE.                 withdrawal.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.1-9                                              Revision 56

Rod Position Indication - Shutdown TR 13.1.39 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                         REQUIRED ACTION                  COMPLETION TIME B. Required Action and          B.1 Action shall be initiated to place   1 hour Completion Time of                 the unit in a lower MODE.
Condition A not met.
AND B.2 Be in MODE 4                         7 hours AND B.3 Be in MODE 5                         31 hours SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                        FREQUENCY TRS 13.1.39.1     Verify each DRPI agrees within 12 steps of the group       Once prior to demand position when the rods are stationary and           increasing Keff within 24 steps of the group demand position during rod    above 0.95 after motion over the full indicated range of rod travel.        each removal of the reactor vessel head.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.1-10                                 Revision 56

Moveable Incore Detection System TR 13.2.31 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TR 13.2.31 Moveable Incore Detection System TR LCO 13.2.31              The Movable Incore Detection System shall be OPERABLE with:
: a.        At least 75% of the detector thimbles,
: b.        A minimum of two detector thimbles per core quadrant, and
: c.        Sufficient movable detectors, drive, and readout equipment to map these thimbles.
APPLICABILITY:              When the Movable Incore Detection System is used for:
: a.        Recalibration of the Excore Neutron Flux Detection System, or
: b.        Monitoring the QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO, or N
: c.        Measurement of F 'H , FQ(Z) and Fxy.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more required                   A.1 Restore the movable incore                      Prior to using the system movable incore detection                    detection system to OPERABLE for the above listed system component(s)                         status.                                       monitoring and inoperable.                                                                               calibration functions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.2-1                                              Revision 68

Moveable Incore Detection System TR 13.2.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                    FREQUENCY TRS 13.2.31.1   Verify Movable Incore Detection System OPERABILITY Within 24 hours by irradiating each required detector and determining prior to using the the acceptability of its voltage curve.                system for the above listed monitoring and calibration functions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.2-2                              Revision 68

Axial Flux Difference TR 13.2.32 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TR 13.2.32 Axial Flux Difference (AFD)
TR LCO 13.2.32       The Axial Flux Difference (AFD) Monitor Alarm shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:       MODE 1 with THERMAL POWER > 50% RTP.
                                                                   - NOTE -
Mode 1 with THERMAL POWER > 15% RTP during Unit 1, Cycle 13.
ACTIONS CONDITION                             REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. AFD not within limits of         A.1 Enter applicable Condition(s) in                Immediately TS 3.2.3.                              TS 3.2.3.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.2-3                                              Revision 68

Axial Flux Difference TR 13.2.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.2.32.1   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              - NOTES -
: 1. Only required to be performed when the AFD Monitor Alarm is determined to be inoperable.
: 2. Logged values shall be assumed to exist during interval preceding each logging.
: 3. Only required to be performed for the first 24 hours after restoring the AFD Monitor Alarm to OPERABLE status during Unit 1, Cycle 13.
Monitor and log AFD to verify AFD is within limits for                     1 hour for the first 24 each OPERABLE excore channel.                                              hours that the AFD Monitor Alarm is inoperable AND 30 minutes when AFD Monitor Alarm is inoperable for
                                                                                           > 24 hours AND
                                                                                                   - NOTE -
Only required for Unit 1, Cycle 13 if the AFD Monitor Alarm Cumulative penalty minute history data is not current.
1 hour for the first 24 hours after restoring the AFD Monitor Alarm to OPERABLE status.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.2-4                                              Revision 68

QPTR Alarm TR 13.2.33 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TR 13.2.33 Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (QPTR) Alarm TR LCO 13.2.33      The Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (QPTR) Alarm shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:      MODE 1 with THERMAL POWER > 50% RATED THERMAL POWER.
ACTIONS CONDITION                            REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. QPTR not within limit.          A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately of TS 3.2.4.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                   FREQUENCY TRS 13.2.33.1    --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when the QPTR alarm is determined to be inoperable.
Verify QPTR is within limit by calculation per Technical 12 hours Specification SR 3.2.4.1.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                         13.2-5                                       Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TR 13.2.34 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TR 13.2.34 Power Distribution Monitoring System TR LCO 13.2.34              The Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) shall be OPERABLE with the minimum type and number of valid inputs from the plant computer as defined in Table 13.2.34-1.
APPLICABILITY:              Mode 1 with THERMAL POWER > 25% RTP and the PDMS is used for:
: a.        Recalibration of the Excore Neutron Flux Detection System
: b.        Monitoring the QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO, or N
: c.        Measurement of F 'H , FQ(Z) and Fxy.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more PDMS                       A.1 Restore the required PDMS                       Prior to using the PDMS components or required                      components and plant computer for the above listed plant computer inputs                       inputs to OPERABLE status.                    monitoring and inoperable.                                                                               calibration functions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.2-6                                              Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TR 13.2.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTSS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.2.34.1   Perform a CHANNEL CHECK.                                                   Within 24 hours prior to using the PDMS for the above listed monitoring and calibration functions.
TRS 13.2.34.2   Verify the PDMS has been calibrated within the                             Within 24 hours required frequency.                                                        prior to using the PDMS for the above listed monitoring and calibration functions.
TRS 13.2.34.3   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Neutron detectors and thermocouples are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Verify CHANNEL CALIBRATION has been performed                              Within 24 hours within the required frequency.                                             prior to using the PDMS for the above listed monitoring and calibration functions.
TRS 13.2.34.4   Verify CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST has been                                    Within 24 hours performed within the required frequency.                                   prior to using the PDMS for the above listed monitoring and calibration functions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.2-7                                            Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TR 13.2.34 Table 13.2.34-1 Power Distribution Monitoring System Instrumentation FUNCTION                  REQUIRED CHANNEL                  TECHNICAL INPUTS                 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE
: 1. Control Bank Position                       4                     TRS 13.2.34.1 TRS 13.2.34.4
: 2. RCS Cold Leg Temperature,                    2                    TRS 13.2.34.1 Tcold                                                             TRS 13.2.34.3
: 3. Reactor Power Level                          1                    TRS 13.2.34.1 TRS 13.2.34.3
: 4. NIS Power Range Excore                       6                    TRS 13.2.34.1 Detector Section Signals                                          TRS 13.2.34.3
: 5. Core Exit Thermocouple                      13                    TRS 13.2.34.1 Temperatures                      with > 2 per quadrant           TRS 13.2.34.3 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.2-8                                Revision 68

RTS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.1 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.1 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Times
                                                          - NOTE -
This Technical Requirement contains the listing of Reactor Trip System Instrumentation Response Time limits associated with Technical Specification SR 3.3.1.16 and the applicable Functions in Technical Specification Table 3.3.1-1.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.3-1                                              Revision 72

RTS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.1 Table 13.3.1-1 (Page 1 of 2)
Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Time Limits INITIATION SIGNAL                        RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 1. Manual Reactor Trip                                     N.A.
: 2. Power Range Neutron Flux
: a. High Setpoint                                      d0.5 (1)
: b. Low Setpoint                                       d0.5 (1)
: 3. Power Range Neutron Flux High Positive Rate             N.A.
: 4. Intermediate Range Neutron Flux                         N.A.
: 5. Source Range Neutron Flux                               N.A.
: 6. Overtemperature N-16                                    d 3.3 (1,2)
: 7. Overpower N-16                                          d 2 (1)
: 8. Pressurizer Pressure
: a. Pressurizer Pressure Low                           d2
: b. Pressurizer Pressure High                          d2
: 9. Pressurizer Water Level High                            N.A.
: 10. Reactor Coolant Flow Low                                d 1 (3)
: 11. Not Used                                                N.A.
: 12. Undervoltage - Reactor Coolant Pumps                    d1.1 (4)
(1)  Neutron/gamma detectors are exempt from response time testing. Response time of the neutron/gamma flux signal portion of the channel shall be measured from detector output or input of first electronic component in a channel.
(2)  An additional 6 seconds maximum delay allowance for the RTD/thermal well response time provides an overall Overtemperature N-16 Response Time of d 9.3 seconds for the Tcold input.
(3)  Includes Single Loop (Above P-8) and Two Loops (Above P-7 and Below P-8)
(4)  An additional 0.4 seconds maximum calculated voltage decay time from the opening of RCP breaker until voltage reaches the undervoltage set-point provides an overall time d 1.5 seconds CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.3-2                              Revision 72

RTS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.1 Table 13.3.1-1 (Page 2 of 2)
Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Time Limits INITIATION SIGNAL                         RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 13. Underfrequency - Reactor Coolant Pumps                  d 0.6
: 14. Steam Generator Water Level Low-Low                     d2
: 15. Not Used                                                N.A.
: 16. Turbine Trip
: a. Low Fluid Oil Pressure                             N.A.
: b. Turbine Stop Valve Closure                         N.A.
: 17. Safety Injection Input from ESFAS                       N.A.
: 18. Reactor Trip System Interlocks
: a. Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, P-6               N.A.
: b. Low Power Reactor Trips Block, P-7                 N.A.
: c. Power Range Neutron Flux, P-8                      N.A.
: d. Power Range Neutron Flux, P-9                      N.A.
: e. Power Range Neutron Flux, P-10                     N.A.
: f. Turbine First Stage Pressure, P-13                 N.A.
: 19. Reactor Trip Breakers                                   N.A.
: 20. Reactor Trip Breaker Undervoltage and Shunt Trip        N.A.
Mechanisms
: 21. Automatic Trip Logic                                    N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.3-3                              Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.2 Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Response Times
                                                          - NOTE -
This Technical Requirement contains the listing of ESFAS Instrumentation Response Time limits associated with Technical Specification SR 3.3.2.10 and the applicable functions in Technical Specification Table 3.3.2-1.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.3-4                                              Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 1 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                   RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 1. Safety Injection
: a. Manual Initiation                                      N.A.
: b. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays         N.A
: c. Containment Pressure High 1
: 1. ECCS                                              d 27 (1,5,8) / 27 (4,6,8)
: 2. Reactor Trip                                      d2 (15)
: 3. Containment Ventilation Isolation                 N.A.
: 4. Station Service Water                             N.A.
: 5. Component Cooling Water                           N.A.
: 6. Essential Ventilation Systems                     N.A.
: 7. Emergency Diesel Generator Operation              d12
: 8. Control Room Emergency Recirculation              N.A.
: 9. Containment Spray                                 d32 (7)
(1) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay.
(4) Diesel generator starting delay is not included. Includes centrifugal charging pumps only.
(5) Sequential transfer of charging pump suction from the VCT to the RWST (RWST valves open, then VCT valves close) is not included.
(6) Includes sequential transfer of charging pump suction from the VCT to the RWST (RWST valves open, then VCT valves close).
(7) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay. Includes containment spray pumps only.
(8) RHR mini-flow valves are not included.
(15) The response time of less than or equal to 2 seconds is applicable for MODES 1 and 2 and is measured to the loss of stationary gripper coil only. The response time is not applicable (N.A.) for MODES 3 and 4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.3-5                                      Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 2 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                   RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 1. Safety Injection (continued)
: d. Pressurizer Pressure Low
: 1. ECCS                                              d 27 (1,5,8) / 27 (4,6,8)
: 2. Reactor Trip                                      d 2 (15)
: 3. Containment Ventilation Isolation                 d 5 (16)
: 4. Station Service Water                             N.A.
: 5. Component Cooling Water                           N.A.
: 6. Essential Ventilation Systems                     N.A.
: 7. Emergency Diesel Generator Operation              d12
: 8. Control Room Emergency Recirculation              N.A.
: 9. Containment Spray                                 N.A.
(1) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay.
(4) Diesel generator starting delay is not included. Includes centrifugal charging pumps only.
(5) Sequential transfer of charging pump suction from the VCT to the RWST (RWST valves open, then VCT valves close) is not included.
(6) Includes sequential transfer of charging pump suction from the VCT to the RWST (RWST valves open, then VCT valves close).
(8) RHR mini-flow valves are not included.
(15) The response time of less than or equal to 2 seconds is applicable for MODES 1 and 2 and is measured to the loss of stationary gripper coil only. The response time is not applicable (N.A.) for MODES 3 and 4.
(16) Includes containment pressure relief valves only.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.3-6                                      Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 3 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                   RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 1. Safety Injection (continued)
: e. Steam Line Pressure Low
: 1. ECCS                                              d 37 (3,6,8) / 27 (4,6,8)
: 2. Reactor Trip                                      d 2 (15)
: 3. Containment Ventilation Isolation                 N.A.
: 4. Station Service Water                             N.A.
: 5. Component Cooling Water                           N.A.
: 6. Essential Ventilation Systems                     N.A.
: 7. Emergency Diesel Generator Operation              d12
: 8. Control Room Emergency Recirculation              N.A.
: 9. Containment Spray                                 N.A.
: 2. Containment Spray
: a. Manual Initiation                                      N.A.
: b. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays         N.A.
: c. Containment Pressure High 3                            d119(9)
(3) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay. Includes centrifugal charging pumps only.
(4) Diesel generator starting delay is not included. Includes centrifugal charging pumps only.
(6) Includes sequential transfer of charging pump suction from the VCT to the RWST (RWST valves open, then VCT valves close).
(8) RHR mini-flow valves are not included.
(9) Includes containment spray header isolation valves only.
(15) The response time of less than or equal to 2 seconds is applicable for MODES 1 and 2 and is measured to the loss of stationary gripper coil only. The response time is not applicable (N.A.) for MODES 3 and 4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.3-7                                      Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 4 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                   RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 3. Containment Isolation
: a. Phase A Isolation
: 1. Manual Initiation                                  N.A
: 2. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays N.A.
: 3. Safety Injection                                   d 17 (2,10) / 27 (1,10)
: b. Phase B Isolation
: 1. Manual Initiation                                  N.A.
: 2. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays N.A.
: 3. Containment Pressure High 3                        N.A.
: 4. Steam Line Isolation
: a. Manual Initiation                                      N.A.
: b. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays         N.A.
: c. Containment Pressure High 2                            d7
: d. Steam Line Pressure
: 1. Steam Line Pressure Low                            d7
: 2. Steam Line Pressure Negative Rate High             d7 (1) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay.
(2) Diesel generator starting delay is not included.
(10) Includes Containment Pressure High 1, Pressurizer Pressure Low, and Steam Line Pressure Low initiation signals.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.3-8                                    Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 5 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                    RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 5. Turbine Trip and Feedwater Isolation
: a. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays          N.A.
: b. Steam Generator Water Level High-High, P-14             d 11 (11)
: c. Safety Injection                                        d 7 (10,11)
: 6. Auxiliary Feedwater
: a. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays          N.A.
: b. Not Used                                                N.A.
: c. Steam Generator Water Level Low-Low                     d 60 (12) / 85 (13)
: d. Safety Injection                                        d 60 (1,10,12)
: e. Loss of Offsite Power                                   d 58 (1,14)
: f. Not Used                                                N.A.
: g. Trip of all Main Feedwater Pumps                        N.A.
: h. Not Used                                                N.A.
(1) Includes Diesel Generator starting delay.
(10) Includes Containment Pressure High 1, Pressurizer Pressure Low, and Steam Line Pressure Low initiation signals.
(11) Includes Feedwater Isolation only. Turbine Trip is not included.
(12) Includes motor driven auxiliary feedwater pumps in Units 1 and 2 and feedwater split flow bypass valves in Unit 2 only.
(13) Includes turbine driven auxiliary feedwater pump in Units 1 and 2 and feedwater split flow bypass valves in Unit 2 only.
(14) Includes motor driven auxiliary feedwater pumps only.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.3-9                                Revision 72

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.2 Table 13.3.2-1 (Page 6 of 6)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation System Instrumentation Response Time Limits FUNCTIONAL UNIT AND INITIATION SIGNAL                  RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 7. Automatic Switchover to Containment Sump
: a. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays        N.A.
: b. Refueling Water Storage Tank Level Low-Low            d30 Coincident with Safety Injection
: 8. ESFAS Interlocks
: a. Reactor Trip, P-4                                     N.A.
: b. Pressurizer Pressure, P-11                            N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.3-10                             Revision 72

LOP DG Start Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.5 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.5 Loss of Power (LOP) Diesel Generator (DG) Start Instrumentation Response Times
                                                          - NOTE -
This Technical Requirement contains the listing of Loss of Power Diesel Generator Start Instrumentation Response Time limits associated with Technical Specification SR 3.3.5.4 and applicable functions in Technical Specification Table 3.3.5-1.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.3-11                                              Revision 72

LOP DG Start Instrumentation Response Times TR 13.3.5 Table 13.3.5-1 Loss of Power Diesel Generator Start Instrumentation Response Time Limits INITIATION SIGNAL AND FUNCTION                            RESPONSE TIME IN SECONDS
: 1. Automatic Actuation Logic and Actuation Relays              N.A.
: 2. Preferred Offsite Source bus UV                             N.A.
: 3. Alternate Offsite Source bus UV                             N.A.
: 4. 6.9 KV Class 1E Bus Undervoltage                            d 2 (1)
: 5. 6.9 KV Degraded Voltage                                     d 10 (1, 2, 3) / d 63 (1, 2, 4)
: 6. 480 V Class 1E Bus Low Grid Undervoltage                    d 63 (1,2)
: 7. 480V Class 1E Bus Degraded Voltage                          d 10 (1, 2, 3) / d 63 (1, 2, 4)
(1)  Response time measured to output of undervoltage channel only.
(2)  Two additional seconds allowable for alternate offsite source breaker trip functions.
(3)  With SI (4)  Without SI CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                13.3-12                                       Revision 72

Seismic Instrumentation TR 13.3.31 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.31 Seismic Instrumentation TR LCO 13.3.31              The seismic monitoring instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              At all times ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Seismic monitoring                     A.1 Restore seismic monitoring                      30 days instrument inoperable.                      instrument to OPERABLE status.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.3-13                                              Revision 72

Seismic Instrumentation TR 13.3.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.3.31.1   Perform a CHANNEL CHECK.                                                   31 days TRS 13.3.31.2   Perform a CHANNEL CALIBRATION.                                             18 months TRS 13.3.31.3   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Setpoint verification is not required.
Perform a CHANNEL OPERATIONAL TEST.                                        184 days CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.3-14                                           Revision 72

Source Range Neutron Flux TR 13.3.32 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.32 Source Range Neutron Flux TR LCO 13.3.32              2 channels for source range neutron flux monitoring shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 3, 4, and 5
                                                          - NOTE -
Only applicable if the Rod Control System is not capable of rod withdrawal and all control rods are fully inserted.
ACTIONS CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One required Source                    A.1 Restore channel to OPERABLE                     48 hours Range Neutron Flux                          status.
channel inoperable.
OR A.2 Suspend all operations involving 49 hours positive reactivity changes.
B. Both required Source                   B.1 Restore one channel to                          4 hours Range Neutron Flux                          OPERABLE status.
channels inoperable.
OR B.2 Suspend all operations involving 4 hours positive reactivity changes.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.3-15                                              Revision 72

Source Range Neutron Flux TR 13.3.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.3.32.1   Perform CHANNEL CHECK.                                                      12 hours TRS 13.3.32.2   ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Not required for the Gamma-Metrics range detectors.
Perform COT.                                                                184 days TRS 13.3.32.3   ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              - NOTES -
: 1. Neutron detectors may be excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
: 2. For the source range neutron detectors, performance data is obtained and evaluated.
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.                                                18 months CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.3-16                                            Revision 72

Turbine Overspeed Protection TR 13.3.33 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.33 Turbine Overspeed Protection TR LCO 13.3.33              At least one Turbine Overspeed Protection Sub-system shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1, 2, and 3
                                                                        - NOTE -
Not applicable in MODES 2 and 3 with all main steam line isolation valves and associated bypass valves in the closed position.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry allowed for each steam line.
CONDITION                                 REQUIRED ACTION                                COMPLETION TIME A. One stop valve or one                  A.1 Restore the inoperable valve(s)                 72 hours control valve per high                      to OPERABLE status.
pressure turbine steam line inoperable.                           OR A.2 Close at least one valve in the                 78 hours affected steam line(s).
OR A.3 Isolate the turbine from the steam 78 hours supply.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.3-17                                              Revision 72

Turbine Overspeed Protection TR 13.3.33 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                      REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME B. One stop valve or one       B.1 Restore the inoperable valve(s)      72 hours control valve per low           to OPERABLE status.
pressure turbine steam line inoperable.                 OR B.2 Close at least one valve in the      78 hours affected steam line(s).
OR B.3 Isolate the turbine from the steam 78 hours supply.
C. Both Overspeed Protection C.1 Isolate the turbine from the steam 6 hours Sub-systems inoperable.         supply.
D. Required Actions and        D.1 Initiate action to place the unit in 1 hour associated Completion           a lower MODE.
Times not met.
AND D.2 Be in MODE 3.                        7 hours AND D.3 Be in MODE 4.                        13 hours CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.3-18                                Revision 72

Turbine Overspeed Protection TR 13.3.33 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                                          - NOTE -
The provisions of TRS 13.0.4 are not applicable.
SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.3.33.1           Test the Turbine Trip Block using the Automatic Turbine 14 days Tester (ATT).
TRS 13.3.33.2           Cycle each of the following valves through at least one 26 weeks complete cycle from the running position using the manual test or Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT).
: a.        Four high pressure turbine stop valves,
: b.        Four high pressure turbine control valves,
: c.        Four low pressure turbine stop valves, and
: d.        Four low pressure turbine control valves.
TRS 13.3.33.3           Deleted TRS 13.3.33.4           Disassemble at least one high pressure turbine stop                        40 months valve and one high pressure control valve and perform a visual and surface inspection of valve seats, disks and stems and verify no unacceptable flaws are found.
If unacceptable flaws are found, all other valves of that type shall be inspected.
TRS 13.3.33.5           Visually inspect the disks and accessible portions of the 40 months shafts of at least one low pressure turbine stop valve and one low pressure control valve and verify no unacceptable flaws are found. If unacceptable flaws are found, all other valves of that type shall be inspected.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.3-19                                              Revision 72

Turbine Overspeed Protection TR 13.3.33 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                 FREQUENCY TRS 13.3.33.6   Test the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system 2 of 3 relay 18 months logic and output relays.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.3-20                            Revision 72

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TR 13.3.34 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TR 13.3.34 Plant Calorimetric Measurement TR LCO 13.3.34      The Leading Edge Flow Meter (LEFM) shall be used for the completion of SR 3.3.1.2.
APPLICABILITY:      MODE 1 > 15% RTP ACTIONS CONDITION                     REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME A. LEFM not available          A.1 Restore LEFM to available status Prior to performance of SR 3.3.1.2 B. Required Action or          B.1 Ensure THERMAL POWER             Prior to performance of Completion Time of              d 98.6% RTP.                     SR 3.3.1.2 Condition A not met AND B.2 Perform SR 3.3.1.2 using         As required by feedwater venturis               SR 3.3.1.2 AND B.3 Maintain THERMAL POWER           Until LEFM is restored to d 98.6% RTP.                     available status and SR 3.3.1.2 is performed using LEFM.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.3-21                                 Revision 72

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TR 13.3.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.3.34.1   Verify availability of LEFM using self-diagnostics       Prior to performance of SR 3.3.1.2 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                13.3-22                                 Revision 72

RCS Pressure Isolation Valves TR 13.4.14 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (RCS)
TR 13.4.14 RCS Pressure Isolation Valves This Technical Requirement contains a listing of the RCS Pressure Isolation Valves (PIVs) subject to Technical Specification 3.4.14.
Table 13.4.14-1 Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valves VALVE NUMBER                          FUNCTION 8948 A, B, C, D             Accumulator Tank Discharge 8956 A, B, C, D             Accumulator Tank Discharge 8905 A, B, C, D             SI Hot Leg Injection 8949 A, B, C, D             SI Hot Leg Injection 8818 A, B, C, D             RHR Cold Leg Injection 8819 A, B, C, D             SI Cold Leg Injection 8701 A, B                   RHR Suction Isolation 8702 A, B                   RHR Suction Isolation 8841 A, B                   RHR Hot Leg Injection 8815                        CCP Cold Leg Injection 8900 A, B, C, D             CCP Cold Leg Injection CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                13.4-1                                 Revision 56

Loose Part Detection System TR 13.4.31 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TR 13.4.31 Loose Part Detection System TR LCO 13.4.31              The Loose-Part Detection System shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1 and 2 ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable.
CONDITION                                 REQUIRED ACTION                            COMPLETION TIME A. With one or more required              A.1 Restore required channels to                    30 days Loose-Part Detection                        Operable status.
System channels inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.4.31.1           Perform a CHANNEL CHECK.                                                   24 hours TRS 13.4.31.2           -------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      - NOTE -
Setpoint verification is not required.
Perform a CHANNEL OPERATIONAL TEST.                                        31 days TRS 13.4.31.3           Perform a CHANNEL CALIBRATION.                                             18 months CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.4-2                                              Revision 56

RCS Chemistry TR 13.4.33 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TR 13.4.33 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Chemistry TR LCO 13.4.33             The Reactor Coolant System chemistry shall be maintained within the limits specified in Table 13.4.33-1.
APPLICABILITY:             At all times.
ACTIONS CONDITION                              REQUIRED ACTION           COMPLETION TIME
               - NOTE -
Only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
A. One or more chemistry                   A.1 Restore parameter to within 24 hours parameters in excess of its                Steady-State limit.
Steady-State Limit but within its Transient Limit.
               - NOTE -
Only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
B. Required Action and                     B.1 Be in MODE 3.               6 hours associated Completion Time of Condition A not                AND met.
B.2 Be in MODE 5.               36 hours OR One or more chemistry parameters in excess of its Transient Limit.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.4-3                            Revision 56

RCS Chemistry TR 13.4.33 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                               REQUIRED ACTION                    COMPLETION TIME
               - NOTE -
Applicable in all conditions other than MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
C. Concentration of chloride C.1 Restore concentration of chloride 24 hours or floride in the RCS in                  and floride to within its Steady-excess of its Steady-State                State limit.
Limit.
              - NOTES -
: 1. All Required Actions must be completed whenever this Condition is entered.
: 2. Applicable in all conditions other than MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
D. Required Action and                     D.1 Initiate action to reduce the         Immediately associated Completion                      pressurizer pressure to d 500 Time of Condition C not                    psig.
met.
AND OR D.2 Perform an engineering                Prior to increasing the Concentration of chloride or               evaluation to determine the           pressurizer pressure fluoride in the RCS in                     effects of the out-of-limit condition > 500 psig.
excess of its Transient                    on the structural integrity of the Limit.                                     RCS; determine that the RCS           AND remains acceptable for continued operation.                            Prior to proceeding to MODE 4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                             13.4-4                                     Revision 56

RCS Chemistry TR 13.4.33 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                  FREQUENCY TRS 13.4.33.1   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              - NOTES -
: 1. Not required to be performed for dissolved oxygen when Tavg d 250&deg;F.
: 2. Not required to be met for Chloride and Fluoride until 72 hours after entry into MODE 6 from a defueled state.
Verify the RCS chemistry within the limits by analysis of 72 hours parameter specified in Table 13.4.33-1.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.4-5                                      Revision 56

RCS Chemistry TR 13.4.33 Table 13.4.33-1 Reactor Coolant System Chemistry Limits STEADY-STATE              TRANSIENT PARAMETER                            LIMIT                    LIMIT Dissolved Oxygen (a)                     d 0.10 ppm               d1.00 ppm Chloride (b)                             d 0.15 ppm               d1.50 ppm Fluoride (b)                             d 0.15 ppm               d1.50 ppm (a) Limit not applicable with Tavg less than or equal to 250 &deg;F.
(b) Limit not applicable when Reactor Coolant System is defueled.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.4-6                         Revision 56

Pressurizer TR 13.4.34 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TR 13.4.34 Pressurizer TR LCO 13.4.34            The pressurizer temperature shall be limited to:
: a.        A maximum heatup of 100&deg;F in any 1 hour period, and
: b.        A maximum cooldown of 200&deg;F in any 1 hour period.
APPLICABILITY:            At all times.
ACTIONS CONDITION                             REQUIRED ACTION                    COMPLETION TIME A. ------------------------------------ A.1 Restore pressurizer temperature       30 minutes
              - NOTE -                      to within limits.
All Required Actions must be completed whenever                AND this Condition is entered.
   ------------------------------------ A.2 Perform an engineering                As assigned by the Shift evaluation to determine that the      Manager, commensurate Pressurizer temperature in               effects of the out-of-limit condition with safety.
excess of the required                   on the structural integrity of the limits.                                  pressurizer remains acceptable for continued operation.
B. Required Actions and                 B.1 Be in at least MODE 3.                6 hours associated Completion Times of Condition A not             AND met.
B.2 Reduce pressurizer pressure to        36 hours
                                            < 500 psig.
C. Required Actions and                 C.1 Be in MODE 4.                         6 hours associated Completion Times of Condition B not             AND met.
C.2 Be in MODE 5.                         30 hours CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.4-7                                    Revision 56

Pressurizer TR 13.4.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                   FREQUENCY TRS 13.4.34.1   ------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            - NOTE -
Only required to be performed during system heatup and cooldown.
Verify the pressurizer temperatures to be within the                     30 minutes limits.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.4-8                                        Revision 56

RCS Vents TR 13.4.35 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TR 13.4.35 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Vent Specification TR LCO 13.4.35     At least one Reactor Coolant System vent path consisting of two vent valves in series powered from emergency busses shall be OPERABLE and closed at each of the following locations:
: a.      Reactor vessel head, and
: b.      Pressurizer steam space.
APPLICABILITY:     MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
ACTIONS CONDITION                      REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME A. One Reactor Coolant         A.1 Close the inoperable vent path       Immediately System vent path                 and remove power from the valve inoperable.                      actuators of all the vent valves in the inoperable vent path.
AND A.2 Restore the inoperable vent path 30 days to OPERABLE status.
B. Both Reactor Coolant        B.1 Close the inoperable vent paths Immediately System vent paths                and remove power from the valve inoperable.                      actuators of all the vent valves in the inoperable vent paths.
AND B.2 Restore at least one of the vent     72 hours paths to OPERABLE status.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.4-9                                  Revision 56

RCS Vents TR 13.4.35 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                        REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME C. Required Actions and         C.1 Be in MODE 3.                      6 hours associated Completion Times of Condition A or B    AND not met.
C.2 Be in MODE 5.                      36 hours SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.4.35.1    Verify all manual isolation valves in each vent path are 18 months locked in the open position.
TRS 13.4.35.2    Cycle each vent valve path through at least one          18 months complete cycle of full travel from the control room.
TRS 13.4.35.3    Verify flow through the Reactor Coolant System vent      18 months paths during venting.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.4-10                               Revision 56

ECCS - Containment Debris TR 13.5.31 13.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
TR 13.5.31 ECCS - Containment Debris TR LCO 13.5.31         Pursuant to TS 3.5.2 and 3.5.3, the containment shall be free of loose debris which could restrict, during a LOCA, the pump suctions for the ECCS train(s) required to be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:         MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ACTIONS CONDITION                              REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Loose debris left in               A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately containment which could                  of TS 3.5.2 or 3.5.3 for affected restrict, during a LOCA, the             ECCS train(s) inoperable.
pump suctions for the ECCS train(s) required to be OPERABLE.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.5.31.1       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   - NOTE -
This surveillance not required for entry into MODE 4 provided that for the entire time below MODE 4, (1) restrictions and access controls used for MODES 1 through 4 are maintained and (2) TRS 13.5.31.2 is performed as required to support containment entries.
Perform a visual inspection of accessible areas of                         Once prior to containment to verify that no loose debris (rags, trash, entering MODE 4 clothing, etc.) is present in the containment which could be transported to the containment sump and cause restriction of the pump suctions during LOCA conditions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                            13.5-1                                           Revision 56

ECCS - Containment Debris TR 13.5.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.5.31.2   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed during periods when containment entries are made.
Perform a visual inspection of all areas within                            24 hours containment affected by a containment entry to verify that no loose debris (rags, trash, clothing, etc.) is present in the containment which could be transported to the containment sump and cause restriction of the pump suctions during LOCA conditions.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.5-2                                           Revision 56

ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates TR 13.5.32 13.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
TR 13.5.32 ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates TR LCO 13.5.32        Pursuant to TS 3.5.2 and 3.5.3, the pump lines for the ECCS train(s) required to be OPERABLE shall have the required flow rates.
APPLICABILITY:        MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ACTIONS CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION                  COMPLETION TIME A. Pump lines for the ECCS        A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately train(s) required to be            of TS 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 for affected OPERABLE do not meet               ECCS train(s) inoperable.
required flow rates.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.5-3                                 Revision 56

ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates TR 13.5.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.5.32.1   Performing a flow balance test, during shutdown, and       Once following verify that:                                               completion of modifications to the
: a.       For centrifugal charging pump lines, with a       ECCS subsystems single pump running:                              that alter the subsystem flow
: 1.      The sum of the injection line flow rates, characteristics.
excluding the highest flow rate, is t 245 gpm, and
: 2.      The total pump flow rate is d560 gpm.
: b.       For safety injection pump lines, with a single pump running:
: 1.      The sum of the cold leg injection line flow rates, excluding the highest flow rate, is t 400 gpm, and
: 2.      The total pump flow rate is d 675 gpm.
: c.       For RHR pump lines, with a single pump running, the sum of the cold leg injection line flow rates is t 4652 gpm.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.5-4                                  Revision 56

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TR 13.6.3 Containment Isolation Valves This Technical Requirement contains the listing of Containment Isolation Valves subject to CPSES Technical Specification 3.6.3. Commensurate with Technical Specification Surveillance Requirement SR 3.6.3.5, Table 13.6.3-1 also contains the isolation time limit for each automatic power operated containment isolation valve.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.6-1                                    Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 1 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                           ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                               TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.         NO.*                       LINE OR SERVICE                     (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS
: 1. Phase A Isolation Valves HV-2154      20             Feedwater Sample (FW to Stm Gen #1)                  5          N.A., Note 9 HV-2155      22             Feedwater Sample (FW to Stm Gen #2)                  5          N.A., Note 9 HV-2399      27             Blowdown From Steam Generator #3                     5          N.A.
HV-2398      28             Blowdown From Steam Generator #2                     5          N.A.
HV-2397      29             Blowdown From Steam Generator #1                     5          N.A.
HV-2400      30             Blowdown From Steam Generator #4                     5          N.A 8152         32             Letdow Line to Letdown Heat Exchanger                10         C 8160         32             Letdow Line to Letdown Heat Exchanger                10         C 8890A        35             RHR to Cold Leg Loops #1 & #2 Test Line              15         N.A.
8890B        36             RHR to Cold Leg Loops #3 & #4 Test Line              15         N.A.
8047         41             Reactor Makeup Water to Pressure Relief Tank & RC    10         C Pump Stand Pipe 8843         42             SI to RC System Cold Leg Loops #1, #2, #3, & #4 Test 10         N.A.
Line 8881         43             SI to RC System Hot Leg Loops #2 & #3 Test Line      10         N.A.
8824         44             SI to RC System Hot Leg Loops #1 & #4 Test Line      10         N.A.
8823         45             SI to RC System Cold Leg Loops #1, #2, #3, & #4 Test 10         N.A.
Line 8100         51             Seal Water Return and Excess Letdown                 10         C 8112         51             Seal Water Return and Excess Letdown                 10         C 7136         52             RCDT Heat Exchanger to Waste Hold up Tank            10         C LCV-1003     52             RCDT Heat Exchanger to Waste Hold up Tank            10         C HV-5365      60             Demineralized Water Supply                           10         C HV-5366      60             Demineralized Water Supply                           10         C HV-5157      61             Containment Sump Pump Discharge                      5          C HV-5158      61             Containment Sump Pump                                5          C CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.6-2                                      Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                  ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                      TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO. NO.*                      LINE OR SERVICE               (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS HV-3487   62         Instrument Air to Containment                   5          C 8825      63         RHR to Hot Leg Loops #2 & #3 Test Line          15         N.A.
HV-2405   73         Sample from Steam Generator #1                  5          N.A.
HV-4170   74         RC Sample from Hot Legs                         5          C HV-4168   74         RC Sample from Hot Leg #1                       5          C HV-4169   74         RC Sample from Hot Leg #4                       5          C HV-2406   76         Sample from Steam Generator #2                  5          N.A.
HV-4167   77         Pressurizer Liquid Space Sample                 5          C HV-4166   77         Pressurizer Liquid Space Sample                 5          C HV-4176   78         Pressurizer Steam Space Sample                  5          C HV-4165   78         Pressurizer Steam Space Sample                  5          C HV-2407   79         Sample from Steam Generator #3                  5          N.A.
HV-4175   80         Accumulators                                    5          C HV-4171   80         Sample From Accumulator #1                      5          C HV-4172   80         Sample From Accumulator #2                      5          C HV-4173   80         Sample From Accumulator #3                      5          C HV-4174   80         Sample From Accumulator #4                      5          C HV-7311   81         RC PASS Sample Discharge to RCDT                5          C HV-7312   81         RC PASS Sample Discharge to RCDT                5          C HV-2408   82         Sample from Steam Generator #4                  5          N.A.
8871      83         Accumulator Test and Fill                       10         C 8888      83         Accumulator Test and Fill                       10         C 8964      83         Accumulator Test and Fill                       10         C HV-5556   84         Containment Air PASS Return                     5          C HV-5557   84         Containment Air PASS Return                     5          C HV-5544   94         Radiation Monitoring Sample                     5          C HV-5545   94         Radiation Monitoring Sample                     5          C CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.6-3                                Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                        ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                            TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.         NO.*                        LINE OR SERVICE                 (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS HV-5558      97             Containment Air PASS Inlet                        5          C HV-5559      97             Containment Air PASS Inlet                        5          C HV-5560      100            Containment Air PASS Inlet                        5          C HV-5561      100            Containment Air PASS Inlet                        5          C HV-5546      102            Radiation Monitoring Sample Return                5          C HV-5547      102            Radiation Monitoring Sample Return                5          C 8880         104            N2 Supply to Accumulators                         10         C 7126         105            H2 Supply to RC Drain Tank                        10         C 7150         105            H2 Supply to RC Drain Tank                        10         C HV-4710      111            CCW Supply to Excess Letdown & RC Drain Tank      5          N.A.
Heat Exchanger HV-4711      112            CCW Return to Excess Letdown & RC Drain Tank Heat 5          N.A.
Exchanger HV-3486      113            Service Air to Containment                        5          C HV-4725      114            Containment CCW Drain Tank Pumps Discharge        10         C HV-4726      114            Containment CCW Drain Tank Pumps Discharge        10         C 8027         116            Nitrogen Supply to PRT                            10         C 8026         116            Nitrogen Supply to PRT                            10         C HV-6084      120            Chilled Water Supply to Containment Coolers       15         C HV-6082      121            Chilled Water Return to Containment Coolers       15         C HV-6083      121            Chilled Water Return to Containment Coolers       15         C HV-4075B     124            Fire Protection System Isolation                  10         C HV-4075C     124            Fire Protection System Isolation                  10         C
: 2. Phase B Isolation Valves HV-4708      117            CCW Return From RCPs Motors                      30         C HV-4701      117            CCW Return From RCPs Motors                      30         C HV-4700      118            CCW Supply To RCPs Motors                        30         C CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.6-4                                  Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                       ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                           TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.        NO.*                         LINE OR SERVICE               (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS HV-4709     119             CCW Return From RCPs Thermal Barrier           15         C HV-4696     119             CCW Return From RCPs Thermal Barrier           15         C
: 3. Containment Ventilation Isolation Valves HV-5542     58              Hydrogen Purge Supply                           N.A.       C HV-5543     58              Hydrogen Purge Supply                           N.A.       C HV-5563     58              Hydrogen Purge Supply                           N.A.       C HV-5540     59              Hydrogen Purge Exhaust                          N.A.       C HV-5541     59              Hydrogen Purge Exhaust                          N.A.       C HV-5562     59              Hydrogen Purge Exhaust                          N.A.       C HV-5536     109             Containment Purge Air Supply                    N.A.       C HV-5537     109             Containment Purge Air Supply                    N.A.       C HV-5538     110             Containment Purge Air Exhaust                   N.A.       C HV-5539     110             Containment Purge Air Exhaust                   N.A.       C HV-5548     122             Containment Pressure Relief                     5          C Note 8 HV-5549     122             Containment Pressure Relief                     5          C Note 8
: 4. Manual Valves MS-711#     4a              TDAFW Pump Bypass Warm-up Valve                 N.A.       N.A.
MS-390      5a              N2 Supply to Steam Generator #1                 N.A.       N.A.
MS-387      9a              N2 Supply to Steam Generator #2                 N.A.       N.A.
MS-384      13a             N2 Supply to Steam Generator #3                 N.A.       N.A.
MS-712#     17a             TDAFW Pump Bypass Warm-up Valve                 N.A.       N.A.
MS-393      18a             N2 Supply to Steam Generator #4                 N.A.       N.A.
FW-116      20              Feedwater Sample (FW to Stm Gen #1)             N.A.       N.A., Note 9 FW-113      22              Feedwater Sample (FW to Stm Gen #2)             N.A.       N.A., Note 9 FW-106      20b             N2 Supply to Steam Generator #1                 N.A.       N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.6-5                                Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                     ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                         TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO. NO.*                     LINE OR SERVICE                  (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS FW-104    22b        N2 Supply to Steam Generator #2                    N.A.       N.A.
FW-102    24b        N2 Supply to Steam Generator #3                    N.A.       N.A.
FW-108    26b        N2 Supply to Steam Generator #4                    N.A.       N.A.
7135#     52         RCDT Heat Exchanger to Waste Holdup Tank           N.A.       C MS-101    4          TDAFWP Steam Supply                                N.A.       N.A.
MS-128    17         TDAFWP Steam Supply                                N.A.       N.A.
SF-011    56         Refueling Water Purification to Refueling Cavity   N.A.       C SF-012    56         Refueling Water Purification to Refueling Cavity   N.A.       C SF-021    67         Refueling Cavity to Refueling Water Purification   N.A.       C SF-022    67         Refueling Cavity to Refueling Water Purification   N.A.       C 1SF-053   71         Refueling Cavity Skimmer Pump Discharge            N.A.       C 2SF-0055 1SF-054   71         Refueling Cavity Skimmer Pump Discharge            N.A.       C 2SF-0056 SI-8961#  83         Accumulator Test and Fill                          N.A.       N.A.
HV-2333B# 2          MSIV Bypass from Steam Generator #1                N.A.       Note 1 HV-2334B# 7          MSIV Bypass from Steam Generator #2                N.A.       Note 1 HV-2335B# 11         MSIV Bypass from Steam Generator #3                N.A.       Note 1 HV-2336B# 15         MSIV Bypass from Steam Generator #4                N.A.       Note 1 1BS-0016# 130        Airlock Hydraulic System                           N.A.       N.A.
1BS-0017# 130        Airlock Hydraulic System                           N.A.       N.A.
1BS-0030# 131        Airlock Hydraulically Operated Equalization        N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 1BS-0025# 131        Airlock Hydraulically Operated Equalization        N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 1BS-0056# 131a       Airlock Manual Equalization                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 1BS-0044# 131a       Airlock Manual Equalization                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 1BS-0029# 131a       Airlock Manual Equalization                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 1BS-0015# 131a       Airlock Manual Equalization                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.6-6                                  Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                       ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                           TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.       NO.*                         LINE OR SERVICE               (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS BS-0202#   132             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 BS-0203#   132             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 2BS-0016# 133              Airlock Hydraulic System                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0017# 133              Airlock Hydraulic System                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0039# 133              Airlock Hydraulic System                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0040# 133              Airlock Hydraulic System                        N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0030# 134              Airlock Hydraulically Operated Equalization     N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 2BS-0025# 134              Airlock Hydraulically Operated Equalization     N.A.       Notes 5, 6, 7 2BS-0056# 134a             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0044# 134a             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0029# 134a             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6 2BS-0015# 134a             Airlock Manual Equalization                     N.A.       Notes 5, 6
: 5. Power-Operated Isolation Valves HV-2452-1 4                Main Steam to Aux. FPT From Steam Line # 4      N.A.       N.A PV-2325    5               Atmospheric Relief Steam Generator              N.A.       Note 3 PV-2326    9               Atmospheric Relief Steam Generator              N.A.       Note 3 PV-2327    13              Atmospheric Relief Steam Generator              N.A.       Note 3 HV-2452-2 17               Main Steam to Aux. FPT From Steam Line # 1      N.A.       N.A.
PV-2328    18              Atmospheric Relief Steam Generator              N.A.       Note 3 HV-2491A   20a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #1       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2491B   20a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #1       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2492A   22a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #2       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2492B   22a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #2       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2493A   24a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #3       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2493B   24a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #3       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2494A   26a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #4       N.A.       N.A.
HV-2494B   26a             Auxiliary Feedwater to Steam Generator #4       N.A.       N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                          13.6-7                                Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                          ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                              TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.       NO.*                      LINE OR SERVICE                      (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS 8701B       33         RHR From Hot Leg Loop #4                                N.A.       N.A.
8701A       34         RHR From Hot Leg Loop #1                                N.A.       N.A.
8809A       35         RHR From Cold Leg Loops #1 and #2                       N.A.       N.A.
8809B       36         RHR From Cold Leg Loops #3 and #4                       N.A.       N.A.
8801A       42         Safety Injection to Cold Leg Loops #1, #2, #3, and #4   N.A.       N.A.
8801B       42         Safety Injection to Cold Leg Loops #1, #2, #3, and #4   N.A.       N.A.
8802A       43         SI Injection to RCS Hot Leg Loops #2 and #3             N.A.       N.A.
8802B       44         SI Injection to RCS Hot Leg Loops #1 and #4             N.A.       N.A.
8835        45         SI Injection to RCS Cold Leg Loops #1, #2, #3, and #4 N.A.         N.A.
8351A       47         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #1)                     N.A.       N.A.
8351B       48         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #2)                     N.A.       N.A.
8351C       49         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #3)                     N.A.       N.A.
8351D       50         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #4)                     N.A.       N.A.
HV-4777     54         Containment Spray to Spray Header (Train B)             N.A.       N.A.
HV-4776     55         Containment Spray to Spray Header (Train A)             N.A.       N.A.
8840        63         RHR to Hot Leg Loops #2 and #3                          N.A.       N.A.
8811A       125        Containment Recirc. Sump to RHR Pumps (Train A)         N.A.       N.A.
8811B       126        Containment Recirc. Sump to RHR Pumps (Train B)         N.A.       N.A.
HV-4782     127        Containment Recirc. to Spray Pumps (Train A)            N.A.       N.A.
HV-4783     128        Containment Recirc. to Spray Pumps (Train B)            N.A.       N.A.
: 6. Check Valves 8818A       35         RHR to Cold Leg Loop #1                                 N.A.       N.A.
8818B       35         RHR to Cold Leg Loop #2                                 N.A.       N.A.
8818C       36         RHR to Cold Leg Loop #3                                 N.A.       N.A.
8818D       36         RHR to Cold Leg Loop #4                                 N.A.       N.A.
8046        41         Reactor Makeup Water to Pressurizer Relief Tank and N.A.           C RC Pump Stand Pipe CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.6-8                                       Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                         ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                             TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO. NO.*                      LINE OR SERVICE                     (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS 8815      42         High Head Safety Injection to Cold Leg Loops #1, #2,   N.A.       N.A.
                     #3, and #4 SI-8905B  43         SI to RC System Hot Leg Loop #2                        N.A.       N.A.
SI-8905C  43         SI to RC System Hot Leg Loop #3                        N.A.       N.A.
SI-8905A  44         SI to RC System Hot Leg Loop #1                        N.A.       N.A.
SI-8905D  44         SI to RC System Hot Leg Loop #4                        N.A.       N.A.
SI-8819A  45         SI to RC System Cold Leg Loop #1                       N.A.       N.A.
SI-8819B  45         SI to RC System Cold Leg Loop #2                       N.A.       N.A.
SI-8819C  45         SI to RC System Cold Leg Loop #3                       N.A.       N.A.
SI-8819D  45         SI to RC System Cold Leg Loop #4                       N.A.       N.A.
8381      46         Charging Line to Regenerative Heat Exchanger           N.A.       C CS-8368A  47         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #1)                    N.A.       N.A.
CS-8368B  48         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #2)                    N.A.       N.A.
CS-8368C  49         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #3)                    N.A.       N.A.
CS-8368D  50         Seal Injection to RC Pump (Loop #4)                    N.A.       N.A.
CS-8180   51         Seal Water Return and Excess Letdown                   N.A.       C CT-145    54         Containment Spray to Spray Header (Tr. B)              N.A.       N.A.
CT-142    55         Containment Spray to Spray Header (Tr. A)              N.A.       N.A.
CI-030   62         Instrument Air to Containment                          N.A.       C 8841A     63         RHR to Hot Leg Loop #2                                 N.A.       N.A.
8841B     63         RHR to Hot Leg Loop #3                                 N.A.       N.A.
SI-8968   104        N2 Supply to Accumulators                              N.A.       C CA-016    113        Service Air to Containment                             N.A.       C CC-629    117        CC Return From RCPs Motors                            N.A.       C CC-713    118        CC Supply to RCPs Motors                              N.A.       C CC-831    119        CC Return From RCPs Thermal Barrier                   N.A.       C CH-024    120        Chilled Water Supply to Containment Coolers            N.A.       C CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.6-9                                      Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                     ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                         TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO.          NO.*                       LINE OR SERVICE               (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS
: 7. Steam Line Isolation Signal HV-2333A      1              Main Steam From Steam Generator #1             5          Notes 2 & 3 HV-2409       3              Drain From Main Steam Line #1                  5          N.A.
HV-2334A      6              Main Steam From Steam Generator #2             5          Notes 2 & 3 HV-2410       8              Drain From Main Steam Line #2                  5          N.A.
HV-2335A      10             Main Steam From Steam Generator #3             5          Notes 2 & 3 HV-2411       12             Drain From Main Steam Line #3                  5          N.A.
HV-2336A      14             Main Steam From Steam Generator #4             5          Notes 2 & 3 HV-2412       16             Drain From Main Steam Line #4                  5          N.A.
: 8. Feedwater Isolation Signal HV-2134       19             Feedwater to Steam Generator #1                5          Note 3 2-FV-2193     20c            Feedwater Preheat Bypass Line S.G. #1          5          Note 3 HV- 2185      20d            Feedwater Bypass Line S.G #1                   5          Note 3 HV-2135       21             Feedwater to Steam Generator #2                5          Note 3 2-FV-2194     22c            Feedwater Preheat Bypass Line S.G. #2          5          Note 3 HV-2186       22d            Feedwater Bypass Line S.G #2                   5          Note 3 HV-2136       23             Feedwater to Steam Generator #3                5          Note 3 2-FV-2195     24c            Feedwater Preheat Bypass Line S.G. #3          5          Note 3 HV-2187       24d            Feedwater Bypass Line S.G #3                   5          Note 3 HV-2137       25             Feedwater to Steam Generator #4                5          Note 3 2-FV-2196     26c            Feedwater Preheat Bypass Line S.G. #4          5          Note 3 HV-2188       26d            Feedwater Bypass Line S.G #4                   5          Note 3
: 9. Safety Injection Actuation Isolation 8105          46             Charging Line to Regenerative Heat Exchanger   10         C
: 10. Relief Valves 8708B         33             RHR From Hot Leg Loop #4                       N.A.       N.A.
8708A         34             RHR From Hot Leg Loop #1                       N.A.       N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.6-10                               Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                 ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                     TIME     LEAK TEST VALVE NO. NO.*                    LINE OR SERVICE               (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS MS-021    5b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #1                N.A.       Note 3 MS-022    5b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #1                N.A.       Note 3 MS-023    5b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #1                N.A.       Note 3 MS-024    5b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #1                N.A.       Note 3 MS-025    5b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #1                N.A.       Note 3 MS-058    9b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #2                N.A.       Note 3 MS-059    9b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #2                N.A.       Note 3 MS-060    9b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #2                N.A.       Note 3 MS-061    9b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #2                N.A.       Note 3 MS-062    9b         Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #2                N.A.       Note 3 MS-093    13b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #3                N.A.       Note 3 MS-094    13b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #3                N.A.       Note 3 MS-095    13b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #3                N.A.       Note 3 MS-096    13b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #3                N.A.       Note 3 MS-097    13b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #3                N.A.       Note 3 MS-129    18b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #4                N.A.       Note 3 MS-130    18b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #4                N.A.       Note 3 MS-131    18b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #4                N.A.       Note 3 MS-132    18b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #4                N.A.       Note 3 MS-133    18b        Main Steam Safety Valve S.G. #4                N.A.       Note 3 RC-036    41a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C WP-7176   52a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C DD-430    60a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 1VD-907   61a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 2VD-896 PS-503    74a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C PS-501    77a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.6-11                              Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 2 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                 ISOLATION   NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                     TIME      LEAK TEST VALVE NO. NO.*                     LINE OR SERVICE              (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS PS-502    78a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C PS-500    80a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C WP-7177   81a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 1SI-8972  83a        Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 2SI-8983 1CC-1067  114a       Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 2CC-1090 1CH-0271  120a       Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 2CH-0281 1CH-0272  121a       Penetration Thermal Relief                     N.A.       C 2CH-0282 SI-0182   125        Pressure Relief for Bonnet of MOV 8811A        N.A.       N.A.
SI-0183   126        Pressure Relief for Bonnet of MOV 8811B        N.A.       N.A.
CT-0309   127        Pressure Relief for Bonnet of MOV HV-4782      N.A.       N.A.
CT-0310   128        Pressure Relief for Bonnet of MOV HV-4783      N.A.       N.A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.6-12                               Revision 70

Containment Isolation Valves TR 13.6.3 Table 13.6.3-1 (Page 12 of 12)
Containment Isolation Valves MAXIMUM FSAR TABLE                                                                ISOLATION       NOTES AND REFERENCE                                                                     TIME         LEAK TEST VALVE NO.           NO.*                        LINE OR SERVICE                         (SECONDS) REQUIREMENTS Table Notations
* Identification code for containment penetration and associated isolation valves in FSAR Tables 6.2.4-1, 6.2.4-2, and 6.2.4-3.
#  May be opened on an intermittent basis under administrative control.
The table does not list local vent, drain and test connections as they are a special class of containment isolation valves and are locked closed to meet containment isolation criteria when located within the penetration boundary.
These valves are subject to the same leak rate testing as the other containment isolation valves in the associated penetration, including all applicable leak testing exceptions (see FSAR table 6.2.4-2, including notes). In addition, if these valves are capped (or isolated by blind flange) and under administrative controls they are not required to be leak rate tested. Airlock test connection isolation valves are part of the airlock boundary; therefore, they are subject to the controls of Specification 3.6.2. As such, the requirements of Specification 3.6.3 do not apply.
Note 1:    All four MSIV bypass valves are locked closed in Mode 1. During Mode 2, 3, and 4 one MSIV bypass valve may be opened provided the other three MSIV bypass valves are locked closed and their associated MSIVs are closed.
Note 2:    These valves require steam to be tested and are thus not required to be tested until the plant is in MODE 3.
Note 3:    These valves are included for table completeness; the requirements of Specification 3.6.3 do not apply.
Instead, the requirements of Specification 3.7.1, 3.7.2, 3.7.3 and 3.7.4 apply for main steam safety valves, main steam isolation valves, feedwater isolation valves and steam generator atmospheric relief valves, respectively.
Note 4:    Not used.
Note 5:    10 CFR 50 Appendix J, Type C testing of these valves is satisfied by the testing of the airlock under Technical Specification Surveillance Requirement 3.6.2.1.
Note 6:    These valves are included for table completeness; the requirements of Specification 3.6.3 do not apply.
Instead, these valves are considered an integral part of the airlock associated with their respective airlock door. Therefore, they are subject to the controls of Specification 3.6.2.
Note 7:    These valves are secured in position by hydraulic system locks and/or interlocks and do not require separate locks.
Note 8:    Including the instrumentation delays of the containment ventilation isolation signal from Pressurizer Pressure Low.
Note 9:    Upon implementation of FDA-1999-000382-01-00 and acceptance, (1) the requirements for valves HV-2154 and HV-2155 are no longer valid and (2) the requirements for valves FW-113 and FW-116 become effective.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                             13.6-13                                           Revision 70

Containment Spray System TR 13.6.6 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TR 13.6.6 Containment Spray System The performance test requirements for the Containment Spray System pumps subject to SR 3.6.6.4 is as follows:
In the test mode each Containment Spray pump is required to provide a total discharge flow through the test header of greater than or equal to 3300 gpm at 245 psid with the pump eductor line open.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.6-14                                Revision 70

Spray Additive System TR 13.6.7 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TR 13.6.7 Spray Additive System This Technical Requirement contains the detailed technical requirements for verifying equilibrium Containment emergency sump pH commensurate with Technical Specification (TS) Surveillance Requirement SR 3.6.7.1. ACTIONS for not verifying equilibrium Containment emergency sump pH is contained in Technical Specification 3.6.7. The performance test requirements for the Spray Additive System subject to TS SR 3.6.7.1 are as follows:
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                       FREQUENCY TRS 13.6.7.1      Verify each spray additive manual, power operated, and 31 days automatic valve in the flow path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position is in the correct position.
TRS 13.6.7.2      Verify spray additive tank solution level is > 91% and     184 days
                  < 94%.
TRS 13.6.7.3      Verify spray additive tank NaOH solution concentration 184 days is > 28% and < 30% by weight.
TRS 13.6.7.4      Verify each spray additive automatic valve in the flow 18 months path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, actuates to the correct position on an actual or simulated actuation signal.
TRS 13.6.7.5      Verify spray additive flow from each solutions flow       5 years path.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.6-15                                  Revision 70

ARV - Air Accumulator Tank TR 13.7.31 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.31 Steam Generator Atmospheric Relief Valve (ARV) - Air Accumulator Tank TR LCO 13.7.31       Pursuant to TS 3.7.4, the air accumulator tank for each ARV required to be OPERABLE shall be at a pressure greater than or equal to 80 psig.
APPLICABILITY:       MODES 1, 2, and 3.
ACTIONS CONDITION                        REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME A. Air accumulator tank(s)       A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately pressure not within limits.        of TS 3.7.4 for affected ARV(s) inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.31.1     Verify that the air accumulator tank pressure is within    24 hours limits.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.7-1                                 Revision 60

Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation TR 13.7.32 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.32 Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation TR LCO 13.7.32      The temperatures of both the primary and secondary coolants in the steam generators shall be greater than 70&deg;F when the pressure of either coolant in the steam generator is greater than 200 psig.
APPLICABILITY:      At all times.
ACTIONS CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME A. Pressure / Temperature       A.1 Reduce the steam generator         30 minutes Limitations not met.             pressure of the applicable sides to less than or equal to 200 psig.
AND A.2 Perform an engineering             Prior to increasing steam evaluation to determine the effect generator coolant of the overpressurization on the   temperatures above structural integrity of the steam  200 &deg;F generator. Determine that the steam generator remains acceptable for continued operation.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.7-2                                  Revision 60

Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation TR 13.7.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.32.1   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Not required to be performed for the associated steam generator when the temperature of both the primary and secondary coolant is > 70 degrees F, or both the primary and secondary coolants are vented and no longer capable of being pressurized.
Verify that the pressure in each side of the steam                         1 hour generator is less than 200 psig.
TRS 13.7.32.2   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only Required when vent paths for the associated steam generator are being used to meet the LCO.
Verify the primary and secondary vent paths are                            24 hours established for the associated steam generator.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.7-3                                           Revision 60

Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and SSI Dam TR 13.7.33 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.33 Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and Safe Shutdown Impoundment (SSI) Dam TR LCO 13.7.33       The average sediment depth shall be less than or equal to 1.5 feet in the service water intake channel and the SSI dam shall exhibit no abnormal degradation or erosion.
APPLICABILITY:       MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
ACTIONS CONDITION                        REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME A. With the average sediment A.1 Initiate action in accordance with Immediately depth in the service water         the Corrective Action Program to intake channel greater than        remove sediment from the 1.5 feet.                          service water intake channel.
B. The SSI dam has abnormal B.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately degradation or erosion.            of TS 3.7.9 for SSI inoperable due to a degraded dam.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.33.1      Visually inspect the SSI dam and verify no abnormal       12 months degradation or erosion.
TRS 13.7.33.2      Verify that the average sediment depth in the service     12 months water intake channel is less than or equal to 1.5 feet.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.7-4                                 Revision 60

Flood Protection TR 13.7.34 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.34 Flood Protection TR LCO 13.7.34            Flood protection shall be provided for all safety-related systems, components, and structures when the water level of the Squaw Creek Reservoir (SCR) exceeds 777.5 feet.
                                                                      - NOTE -
All elevations and SCR water levels in this specification are expressed in feet Mean Sea Level, USGS datum.
APPLICABILITY:            At all times.
ACTIONS CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. ------------------------------------ A.1 Initiate action to place the unit in 1 hours
              - NOTE -                         a lower MODE.
Only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.                  AND A.2 Be in MODE 3.                                   7 hours Required flood protection measure(s) not in place.              AND A.3 Be in MODE 4.                                   13 hours AND A.4 Be in MODE 5.                                   37 hours CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                               13.7-5                                              Revision 60

Flood Protection TR 13.7.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.34.1   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when SCR water level is
                < 776 feet.
Verify the water level of SCR is measured to be within                     24 hours the limits.
TRS 13.7.34.2   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when SCR water level is t 776 feet.
Verify the water level of SCR is measured to be within                     2 hours the limits.
TRS 13.7.34.3   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when SCR water level is
                > 777.0 feet.
Verify flood protection measures are in effect by                          12 hours verifying that flow paths from the SCR which are open for maintenance are isolated from the SCR by isolation valves, or stop gates, or are at an elevation above 790 feet.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.7-6                                           Revision 60

Flood Protection TR 13.7.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.34.4   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when SCR water level is
                > 777.5 feet.
Verify flood protection measures are in effect by                          Once within 2 hours verifying that any equipment which is to be opened or is                   after SCR water open for maintenance is isolated from the SCR by                           level > 777.5 feet isolation valves, or stop gates, or is at an elevation above 790 feet.                                                            AND Prior to opening any equipment for maintenance CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.7-7                                            Revision 60

Snubbers TR 13.7.35 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.35 Snubbers TR LCO 13.7.35              All snubbers shall be OPERABLE. The only snubbers excluded from the requirements are (1) those installed on nonsafety-related systems and then only if their failure or failure of the system on which they are installed would have no adverse effect on any safety-related system or (2) those snubber(s) that have an evaluation which determines that the supported TS system(s) do not require the snubber(s) to be functional in order to support the OPERABILITY of the system(s).
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4. MODES 5 and 6 for snubbers located on systems required OPERABLE in those MODES.
                                                                        - NOTE -
While this LCO is not met, MODE changes shall be restricted to those MODE changes allowed by the applicable LCOs for the equipment which may be potentially inoperable as a result of the inoperable snubber(s).
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry allowed for each snubber.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more snubbers                   A.1 Enter the operability                           Immediately inoperable.                                 determination process for attached system(s).
AND A.2 Perform an engineering                          72 hours evaluation in accordance with the approved snubber augmented inservice inspection program on the attached component.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.7-8                                              Revision 60

Snubbers TR 13.7.35 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                 FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.35.1   Each required snubber shall be demonstrated        Per snubber OPERABLE by performance of the requirements of the augmented approved snubber augmented inservice inspection    inservice inspection program in TR 15.5.31.                             program.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM             13.7-9                               Revision 60

Area Temperature Monitoring TR 13.7.36 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.36 Area Temperature Monitoring TR LCO 13.7.36              The maximum temperature limit for normal conditions of each area shown in Table 13.7.36-1 shall not be exceeded for more than 8 hours and the maximum temperature limit for abnormal conditions of each area given in Table 13.7.36-1 shall not be exceeded.
APPLICABILITY:              Whenever the equipment in an affected area is required to be OPERABLE.
                                                                        - NOTE -
While this LCO is not met due to exceeding the maximum temperature limit for abnormal conditions, MODE changes shall be restricted to those allowed by the applicable LCOs for the equipment which may be potentially inoperable due to exceeding the limit for abnormal conditions.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate condition entry is allowed for each area listed in Table 13.7.36-1.
CONDITION                                 REQUIRED ACTION                            COMPLETION TIME A. One or more areas exceeds              ---------------------------------------------------
the maximum temperature                                   - NOTE -
limit(s) for normal                   Required Action must be completed conditions shown in                   whenever Condition A is entered.
Table 13.7.36-1 for more              ---------------------------------------------------
than 8 hours.
A.1 Initiate action in accordance with Immediately the Corrective Action Program to restore the temperature(s) to within normal limits, including an analysis to demonstrate the continued OPERABILITY of the affected equipment.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.7-10                                              Revision 60

Area Temperature Monitoring TR 13.7.36 ACTIONS (continued)
B. One or more areas exceeds B.1.1 Restore the area(s) to within           4 hours the maximum temperature               the maximum temperature limit(s) for abnormal                 limit(s) for abnormal conditions.
conditions shown in Table 13.7.36-1.                   OR B.1.2.1 Enter the appropriate            4 hours Condition(s) of the appropriate TS(s) for the equipment in the affected area(s) inoperable.
OR B.1.2.2.1 Perform a review of the        4 hours qualification envelope for the affected equipment.
AND B.1.2.2.2 Declare INOPERABLE any 4 hours affected equipment in a qualification envelope that has been exceeded.
OR B.1.3 Perform an analysis that           4 hours justifies continued operation.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.36.1       Verify the temperature in each of the areas shown in      12 hours Table 13.7.36-1 to be within limit(s).
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.7-11                                Revision 60

Area Temperature Monitoring TR 13.7.36 Table 13.7.36-1 Area Temperature Monitoring MAXIMUM AREA                                TEMPERATURE LIMIT
(&deg;F)
NORMAL          ABNORMAL CONDITIONS        CONDITIONS
: 1. Electrical and Control Building Normal Areas                                                104               131 Control Room Main Level (El. 830'-0")                        80               104 Control Room Technical Support Area (El. 840'-6")                                               104               104 UPS/Battery Rooms                                           104               113 Chiller Equipment Areas                                     122               131
: 2. Fuel Building Normal Areas                                                104               131 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling Pump Rooms                          122               131
: 3. Safeguards Buildings Normal Areas                                                104               131 AFW, RHR, SI, Containment Spray Pump Rooms                                          122               131 RHR Valve and Valve Isolation Tank Rooms                    122               131 RHR/CT Heat Exchanger Rooms                                 122               131 Diesel Generator Area                                       122               131 Diesel Generator Equipment Rooms                            130               131 Day Tank Room                                               122               131
: 4. Auxiliary Building                                          127               131 Normal Areas                                                104               131 CCW, CCP Pump Rooms                                         122               131 CCW Heat Exchanger Area                                     122               131 CVCS Valve and Valve Operating Rooms                        122               131 Auxiliary Steam Drain Tank Equip. Room                      122               131 Waste Gas Tank Valve Operating Room                         122               131
: 5. Service Water Intake Structure                              127               131
: 6. Containment Buildings General Areas                                               120               129 Reactor Cavity Exhaust                                      150               190 CRDM Shroud Exhaust                                         163               172 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.7-12                            Revision 60

Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units TR 13.7.37 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.37 Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units TR LCO 13.7.37        The safety chilled water system electrical switchgear area emergency fan coil units shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:        MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
ACTIONS CONDITION                          REQUIRED ACTION                     COMPLETION TIME A. One or more required            A.1 Declare Safety Chilled Water        Immediately electrical switchgear area           train(s) inoperable (TS 3.7.19).
emergency fan coil unit(s) inoperable.                     OR A.2 Declare affected fan coil unit(s)   Immediately and their supported equipment inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.37.1       Verify electrical switchgear area emergency fan coil      18 months units start on an actual or simulated Safety Injection actuation signal.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.7-13                                Revision 60

Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit TR 13.7.38 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.38 Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit TR LCO 13.7.38              The valve body and neck of each main feedwater isolation valve shall be greater than or equal to 90&deg;F, when feedwater line pressure is greater than 675 psig.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1, 2, 3 and during pressure testing of the steam generator or main feedwater line.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry allowed for each main feedwater isolation valve.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more main                       A.1 Restore main feedwater isolation 1 hour feedwater isolation valves                  valve(s) pressure and/or outside of the required                     temperature to within limits.
limits.
AND A.2 ------------------------------------------
                                                               - NOTE -
Required Action A.2 must be completed whenever Condition A is entered.
Perform an engineering                        72 hours evaluation to determine the effect of the overpressure on the structural integrity of the main feedwater isolation valve(s) and determine that the main feedwater isolation valve(s) remains acceptable for continued operation.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.7-14                                              Revision 60

Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit TR 13.7.38 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                             REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME B. Required Actions and            B.1 Be in MODE 3.                                   6 hours associated Completion Times of Condition A not        AND met.
B.2 Be in MODE 4.                                   12 hours SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                         FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.38.1    --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                - NOTE -
Not required to be performed in MODE 1 with the main feedwater isolation valve open.
Each main feedwater isolation valve shall be                               12 hours determined to be greater than or equal to 90&deg;F.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.7-15                                           Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.39 Tornado Missile Shields TR LCO 13.7.39              Required equipment shall be protected from tornado generated missiles as required by Allowances of Table 13.7.39-1.
APPLICABILITY:              Whenever supported equipment is required to be OPERABLE.
                                                          - NOTE -
Only applicable if any required missile shield is not in its missile protection configuration.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry allowed for each missile shield.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Allowances of                          A.1 Declare equipment supported by Immediately Table 13.7.39-1 not met for                 affected missile shield(s) one or more missile shields.                inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.39.1           Verify allowances of Table 13.7.39-1 are satisfied.                        Prior to removal of any missile shield CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.7-16                                              Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: S1-27 Door, Unit 1 Safeguards Corridor El. 810' 6" Related Specifications: 3.7.12 Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided the capability to close immediately on notification of a Tornado Warning exist.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided the capability exists to reinstall immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 2.      Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided:
* Unit 2 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
* It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided:
* Unit 2 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* The capability exists to re-install immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 3.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be open under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.      Units 1 and 2 enter LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
: b.      It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
: c.      It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning, Unit 1 Safety Injection or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                      13.7-17                                  Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: S2-27 Door, Unit 2 Safeguards Corridor El. 810' 6" Related Specifications: 3.7.12 Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided the capability to close immediately on notification of a Tornado Warning exist.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided the capability exists to reinstall immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 2.      Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 1 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided:
* Unit 1 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
* It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning or Unit 1 Safety Injection.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided:
* Unit 1 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* The capability exists to re-install immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 3.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be open under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.      Units 1 and 2 enter LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
: b.      It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
: c.      It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning, Unit 1 Safety Injection or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.7-18                                   Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: S1-38B Door, Auxiliary Bldg. El. 852' 6' S1 -38D Door, Train B Electrical Equipment Area Related Specifications: 3.7.12 (S1-38B only); 3.8.9 (S-38D only)
Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided the capability to close immediately on notification of a Tornado Warning exist.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided the capability exists to reinstall immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 2.      Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided:
* It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
* It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided:
* Unit 2 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* The capability exists to re-install immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 3.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be open under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.      It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
: b.      It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning, Unit 1 Safety Injection or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.7-19                                   Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: S2-38B Door, Auxiliary Bldg. El. 852' 6" S2-38D Door, Train B Electrical Equipment Area Related Specifications: 3.7.12 (S2-38B only); 3.8.9 (S-38D only)
Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided the capability to close immediately on notification of a Tornado Warning exist.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided the capability exists to reinstall immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 2.      Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 1 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary.
: a.      May be open under administrative control provided:
* It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
* It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning or Unit 1 Safety Injection.
: b.      May be removed under administrative control provided:
* Unit 1 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and
* The capability exists to re-install immediately on notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
: 3.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be open under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.      It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
: b.      It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room of a Tornado Warning, Unit 1 Safety Injection or Unit 2 Safety Injection.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     13.7-20                                   Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: Access Cover Plates (4) El. 852' 6", above Unit 1 Safeguard Bldg. Corridor Related Specifications: 3.4.7*, 3.4.8*, 3.7.12, 3.9.5*, and 3.9.6*.
Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary. May be removed under administrative control provided either:
: a.      The floor plugs (El. 831' 6" corridor) over each OPERABLE Unit 1 RHR heat exchanger are in place, or
: b.      The capability exists to re-install the missile shield or floor plugs immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES. If only one RHR system is OPERABLE, either its missile shield or floor plug shall be in place.
: 2.      Unit 1 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 1 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 2 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary. May be removed under administrative control provided:
: a.      Unit 2 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and either
* The floor plugs (El. 831' 6" corridor) over each OPERABLE Unit 1 RHR heat exchanger are in place, or
* The capability exists to re-install the missile shield or floor plugs immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES. If only one RHR system is OPERABLE, either its missile shield or floor plug shall be in place.
 *Only affects RHR operability CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.7-21                                     Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: Access Cover Plates (4) El. 852' 6", above Unit 2 Safeguard Bldg. Corridor Related Specifications: 3.4.7*, 3.4.8*, 3.7.12, 3.9.5*, and 3.9.6*.
Allowance:
: 1.      Unit 1 and 2 in MODES 5 and 6, or Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6 and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is NOT in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary. May be removed under administrative control provided either:
: a.      The floor plugs (El. 831' 6" corridor) over each OPERABLE Unit 2 RHR heat exchanger are in place, or
: b.      The capability exists to re-install the missile shield or floor plugs immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES. If only one RHR system is OPERABLE, either its missile shield or floor plug shall be in place.
: 2.      Unit 2 in MODES 5 and 6, Unit 1 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the Unit 2 Safeguards Bldg. is in Direct Communication with the Unit 1 Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary. May be removed under administrative control provided:
: a.      Unit 1 enters LCO 3.7.12 CONDITION B, and either
* The floor plugs (El. 831' 6" corridor) over each OPERABLE Unit 2 RHR heat exchanger are in place, or
* The capability exists to re-install the missile shield or floor plugs immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES if only one RHR system is OPERABLE, either its missile shield or floor plug shall be in place.
 *Only affects RHR operability CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.7-22                                     Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields: E-40A Door, Control Room Related Specifications: 3.7.10 Allowance:
In all MODES may be open under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.      It is continuously manned, with direct communications established to the control room, and
: b.      It is capable of immediate closure upon notification from the Control Room (of a Tornado Warning, Safety Injection, Loss-of-Offsite Power, or Intake Vent-High Radiation).
Shields: Unit 1 Containment Equipment Hatch Missile Shield (Outer Cover)*
Related Specifications: 3.6.6 Allowance:
Unit 1 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be removed in MODE 4 for up to 72 hours provided the capability exists to immediately reinstall the missile shield upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch or other special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
Not required in MODES 5, 6 or Defueled.
Shields: Unit 2 Containment Equipment Hatch Missile Shield (Outer Cover)*
Related Specifications: 3.6.6 Allowance:
Unit 2 in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May be removed in MODE 4 for up to 72 hours provided the capability exists to immediately reinstall the missile shield upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch or other special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
Not required in MODES 5, 6 or Defueled.
* The Inner cover of the Equipment Hatch is considered part of the containment liner and is addressed in accordance with LCO 3.6.1, Containment.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.7-23                                   Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields:                                                          Related Specifications:
Access Cover Plate, Unit 1 Diesel FO Truck Fill Station           3.8.1, 3.8.2 Access Cover, Unit 1 RWST                                         None Access Cover, Unit 1 CST                                          3.7.6 Access Cover, Unit 1 RMWST                                        None Service Water Tunnel, Manhole Cover (Common) El. 810 6          3.7.8 Removable Slab (Hatch Cover), Electric Fire Pumps                 3.7.8 CPX-FPAPFP-01 AND CPX-FPAPFP-03 Access Cover Plate, Unit 2 Diesel FO Truck Fill Station           3.8.1, 3.8.2 Access Cover, Unit 2 RWST                                         None Access Cover, Unit 2 CST                                          3.7.6 Access Cover, Unit 2 RMWST                                        None Allowance:
May be removed under administrative control provided the capability exists to re-install the missile shield immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service Issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.7-24                                  Revision 60

Tornado Missile Shields TR 13.7.39 Table 13.7.39-1 Missile Shield Allowances Shields:                                                            Related Specifications:
Cover Plates (2), Unit 1 Diesel FO Storage Tanks                    3.8.1, 3.8.2 Access Cover Plates (2), Unit 1 Diesel FO Storage Tanks             3.8.1, 3.8.2 Removable Slab SW Piping (Unit 1/2 Train B) El. 810' 6"             3.7.8 Removable Slab (Hatch Cover) SW Pump, CP1-SWAPSW-02                 3.7.8 Removable Slab (Hatch Cover) SW Pump, CP1-SWAPSW-01                 3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E1A1, Unit 1 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E1A2, Unit 1 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E1B1, Unit 1 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover; MH#E1B2, Unit 1 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Cover Plates (2), Unit 2 Diesel FO Storage Tanks                    3.8.1, 3.8.2 Access Cover Plates (2), Unit 2 Diesel FO Storage Tanks             3.8.1, 3.8.2 Removable Slab (Hatch Cover) SW Pump, CP2-SWAPSW-02                 3.7.8 Removable Slab (Hatch Cover) SW Pump, CP2-SWAPSW-01                 3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2A1, Unit 2 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2A2, Unit 2 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2A3, Unit 2 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2A4, Unit 2 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2A5, Unit 2 SW Train A                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2B1, Unit 2 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2B2, Unit 2 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2B3, Unit 2 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2B4, Unit 2 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Manhole Cover, MH#E2B5, Unit 2 SW Train B                           3.7.8 Allowance:
May be removed under administrative control for up to 72 hours provided:
: a.       The capability exists to re-install the missile shield immediately upon notification of a National Weather Service issued Tornado Warning, Tornado Watch, or other Special Weather Statement with winds in excess of 60 mph affecting CPSES, and
: b.       No more than one OPERABLE train per unit of a system shall have its missile shields removed at one time.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    13.7-25                                  Revision 60

CST Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TR 13.7.41 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TR 13.7.41 Condensate Storage Tank (CST) Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TR LCO 13.7.41              Two CST make-up and reject line isolation valves shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1, 2, and 3, except when the CST make-up and reject line is isolated by a closed and de-activated isolation valve.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
The make-up and reject line may be unisolated intermittently under administrative controls.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One CST make-up and                    A.1 Isolate the make-up and reject                  72 hours reject line isolation valve                 line.
inoperable.
AND A.2 Verify the flowpath is isolated.                Once per 31 days B. Two CST make-up and                    B.1 Isolate the make-up and reject                  4 hours reject line isolation valves                line.
inoperable.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.7-26                                              Revision 60

CST Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TR 13.7.41 ACTIONS (continued)
C. Required Actions and          C.1 Verify by administrative means   4 hours associated Completion              OPERABILITY of backup water Times for Conditions A or B        supply.                         AND not met.
Once per 12 hours thereafter AND C.2 Restore both affected valves to  7 days OPERABLE.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.7.41.1    Verify each CST make-up and reject line isolation valve 18 months actuates to the isolation position on an actual or simulated actuation signal.
TRS 13.7.41.2    Verify a make-up and reject line isolation actuation     18 months signal is initiated on CST HI-HI level.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.7-27                              Revision 60

AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements)
TR 13.8.31 13.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS TR 13.8.31 AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements)
TR LCO 13.8.31        Pursuant to TS 3.8.1 and 3.8.2, the Technical Requirements Surveillances (TRS) listed below for the diesel generator(s) (DGs) required to be capable of supplying the onsite Class 1E power distribution subsystem(s) shall be met.
APPLICABILITY:        MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
ACTIONS CONDITION                              REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. One or more of the                A.1 Enter the applicable Condition(s) Immediately following surveillances not             of TS 3.8.1 or 3.8.2 for the met for required DG(s).                 effected DG(s) inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.8.31.1      Verify diesel generator is aligned to provide standby                       31 days power to the associated emergency busses.
TRS 13.8.31.2      --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  - NOTE -
Verify requirement during MODES 3, 4, 5, 6, or with core off-loaded.
Subject the diesel to inspections in accordance with                       18 months procedures prepared in conjunction with the diesel owners groups preventive maintenance program.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.8-1                                           Revision 66

AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements)
TR 13.8.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.8.31.3   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Verify requirement during MODES 3, 4, 5, 6, or with core off-loaded.
Verify that the auto-connected loads to each diesel                        18 months generator do not exceed the continuous rating of 7,000 kW.
TRS 13.8.31.4   --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               - NOTE -
Verify requirement during MODES 3, 4, 5, 6, or with core off-loaded.
Verify that the following diesel generator lockout                         18 months features prevent diesel generator from starting:
: a.        Barring device engaged, or
: b.        Maintenance Lockout Mode.
TRS 13.8.31.5   Pump out each fuel oil storage tank, remove                                10 Years accumulated sediment and clean the tank using a sodium hypochlorite solution or equivalent.
TRS 13.8.31.6   Perform a pressure test of those portions of the diesel 10 Years fuel oil system designed to Section III, subsection ND of the ASME Code, when tested pursuant to the Inservice Inspection Program.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.8-2                                           Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 13.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS TR 13.8.32 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR LCO 13.8.32              All containment penetration conductor overcurrent protective devices, which are listed in Table 13.8.32-1, shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY:              MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ACTIONS
                                                         - NOTES -
: 1. TR LCO 13.0.4.c is applicable to overcurrent protective devices in circuits which have their associated protective device tripped/removed and their inoperable protective device racked out, locked open, or removed.
: 2. Separate Condition entry is allowed for each overcurrent protection device.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                 13.8-3                                              Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                    REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME A. One or more of the         A.1.1.1 Verify the circuit(s)         72 hours containment penetration            de-energized by racked out, conductor overcurrent              locked open, or removed       AND protective device(s)               inoperable protective inoperable.                        device(s).                    Once per 31 days thereafter AND A.1.1.2 Tripping/ removing the        72 hours associated protective device(s).
OR A.1.2.1 Verify the circuit(s) de-     72 hours energized by tripped/removed associated protective         AND device(s).
Once per 7 days OR                            thereafter A.1.2.2 Verify the circuit(s) de-     72 hours energized by racked out, locked open, or removed       AND inoperable protective device(s).                    Once per 7 days thereafter AND A.2 Declare the affected system(s) or 72 hours component(s) inoperable.
B. Required Actions and       B.1 Be in MODE 3.                     6 hours associated Completion Times not met.             AND B.2 Be in MODE 5.                     36 hours CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.8-4                                Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                        FREQUENCY TRS 13.8.32.1   Verify that the medium voltage 6.9 kV and low voltage      72 months 480V switchgear circuit breakers are OPERABLE by:
AND
: a.      A CHANNEL CALIBRATION of the associated            At least 10% of the protective relays,                                 breakers of a group tested every 18
: b.      An integrated system functional test which         months includes simulated automatic actuation of the system and verifying that each relay and associated circuit breakers and control circuits function as designed, and
: c.      For each circuit breaker found inoperable during these functional tests, one or an additional representative sample of at least 10% of all the circuit breakers of the inoperable type shall also be functionally tested until no more failures are found or all circuit breakers of that type have been functionally tested.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-5                                  Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SURVEILLANCE                                        FREQUENCY TRS 13.8.32.2   Verify that the 480V and lower voltage molded case          72 months circuit breakers are OPERABLE by performing the following:                                                  AND
: a.       Inverse time overcurrent trip test to verify that  At least 10% of the the test trip time does not exceed the maximum     breakers tested trip time per the breaker time-current             every 18 months for characteristics.                                   breaker groups with t4 breakers
: b.       Instantaneous overcurrent trip test.
OR
: c.       Circuit breakers found inoperable during functional testing shall be replaced by            At least 1 breaker OPERABLE breakers prior to resuming                tested every 36 operation.                                         months for breakers groups with 2 or 3
: d.       For each circuit breaker found inoperable during breakers.
these functional tests, an additional representative sample of at least 10% of all the circuit breakers of the inoperable type shall also be functionally tested until no more failures are found or all circuit breakers of that type have been functionally tested.
TRS 13.8.32.3   Subject each medium voltage 6.9kv switchgear circuit 60 months breaker to an inspection and preventive maintenance in accordance with procedures prepared in conjunction with its manufacturers recommendations.
TRS 13.8.32.4   Subject each low voltage 480V switchgear circuit            60 months breaker to an inspection and preventive maintenance in accordance with procedures prepared in conjunction with its manufacturers recommendations.
TRS 13.8.32.5   Subject each 480V and lower voltage molded case             72 months switchgear circuit breaker to an inspection and preventive maintenance in accordance with procedures prepared in conjunction with its manufacturers recommendations.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-6                                  Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 1 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                 SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                  POWERED
: 1. 6.9 KVAC from Switchgears
: a. Switchgear Bus 1A1                                  RCP #11
: 1)   Primary Breaker 1PCPX1 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 1A1-1 or 1A1-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 1A1-1 c)    Relay 51 for 1A1-2 d)    Relay 86/1A1
: b. Switchgear Bus 1A2                                  RCP #12
: 1)   Primary Breaker 1PCPX2 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 1A2-1 or 1A2-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 1A2-1 c)    Relay 51 for 1A2-2 d)    Relay 86/1A2 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-7                               Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 2 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                 SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                  POWERED
: c. Switchgear Bus 1A3                                  RCP #13
: 1)   Primary Breaker 1PCPX3 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 1A3-1 or 1A3-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 1A3-1 c)    Relay 51 for 1A3-2 d)    Relay 86/1A3
: d. Switchgear Bus 1A4                                  RCP #14
: 1)   Primary Breaker 1PCPX4 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breaker 1A4-1 or 1A4-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 1A4-1 c)    Relay 51 for 1A4-2 d)    Relay 86/1A4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-8                               Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 3 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                                    SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                                     POWERED
: 2. 480 VAC from Switchgears 2.1  480V Switchgear 1EB1
: 1. Compartment 3B                                                         Containment Recirc Fan CP1-VAFNAV-01 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNAV1
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNAV1 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB1-1 and BT-1EB13 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNAV1 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNAV1 2.2  480V Switchgear 1EB2
: 1. Compartment 3B                                                         Containment Recirc Fan CP1-VAFNAV-02 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNAV2
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNAV2 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB2-1 and BT-1EB24 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNAV2 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNAV2 2.3  480V Switchgear 1EB3
: 1. Compartment 8B                                                         CRDM Vent Fan CP1-VAFNCB-01 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNCB1
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNCB1 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB3-1 and BT-1EB13 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNCB1 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNCB1 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        13.8-9                                       Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 4 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                                    SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                                     POWERED
: 2. Compartment 9B                                                         Containment Recirc Fan CP1-VAFNAV-03 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNAV3
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNAV3 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB3-1 and BT-1EB13 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNAV3 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNAV3 2.4  480V Switchgear 1EB4
: 1. Compartment 8B                                                         CRDM Vent Fan CP1-VAFNCB-02 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNCB2
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNCB2 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB4-1 and BT-1EB24 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNCB2 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNCB2
: 2. Compartment 9B                                                         Containment Recirc Fan CP1-VAFNAV-04 a)    Primary Breaker 1FNAV4
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 1FNAV4 b)    Backup Breakers 1EB4-1 and BT-1EB24 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
1FNAV4 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
1FNAV4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                      13.8-10                                        Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 5 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                      SYSTEM AND LOCATION                       POWERED
: 3. 480VAC from Motor Control Centers 3.1   Device Location    -    MCC 1EB1-2 Compartment Numbers listed below.
Primary and        -    Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and Backup Breakers         are in the same MCC Compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 1EB1-2          G.E.
COMPT. NO.          BKR. TYPE            SYSTEM POWERED 4G              THED                 Motor Operated Valve 1-TV-4691 4M              THED                 Motor Operated Valve 1-TV-4693 3F              THED                 Containment Drain Tank Pump-03 9H              THED                 Reactor Cavity Sump Pump-01 9M              THED                 Reactor Cavity Sump Pump-02 7H              THED                 Containment Sump #1 Pump-01 7M              THED                 Containment Sump #1 Pump-02 6H              THED                 RCP #11 Motor Space Heater-01 6M              THED                 RCP #13 Motor Space Heater-03 8B              THED                 Incore Detector Drive "A" 8D              THED                 Incore Detector Drive "B" 7B              THED                 Incore Detector Drive "F" 3B              THED                 Stud Tensioner Hoist Outlet-01 7D              THED                 Hydraulic Deck Lift-01 4B              THED                 Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Hoist Receptacle-42 8H              THED                 RC Pipe Penetration Cooling Unit-01 8M              THED                 RC Pipe Penetration Cooling Unit-02 5H              THED                 RCP #11 Oil Lift Pump-01 5M              THED                 RCP #13 Oil Lift Pump-03 10B             THED                 Preaccess Filter Train Package Receptacle-17 10F             THED                 S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 01 (CP1-CFAPRP-01) 12M             THED                 S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 03 (CP1-CFAPRP-03) 12H             THED                 Containment Ltg. XFMR-28 (PNL C11 & C12) 2M              THED                 RC Drain Tank Pump No. 1 2F              THED                 Containment Ltg. XFMR-16 (PNL C7 & C9) 1M              THED                 Containment Ltg. XFMR-12 (PNL C1 & C5) 3M              THED                 Preaccess Fan No. 11 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-11                                    Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 6 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                            SYSTEM AND LOCATION                             POWERED 3.2    Device Location       -     MCC 1EB2-2 Compartment Numbers listed below.
Primary and Backup    -     Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and are Breakers                    located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 1EB2-2              G.E.
COMPT. NO.              BKR. TYPE         SYSTEM POWERED 4G                  THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-TV-4692 4M                  THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-TV-4694 3F                  THED              Containment Drain Tank Pump-04 7H                  THED              Containment Sump No. 2 Pump-03 7M                  THED              Containment Sump No. 2 Pump-04 6H                  THED              RCP #12 Motor Space Heater-02 6M                  THED              RCP #14 Motor Space Heater-04 5B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "C" 2B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "D" 7B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "E" 5D                  THED              Containment Fuel Storage Crane-01 3B                  THED              Stud Tensioner Hoist Outlet-02 4B                  THED              Containment Solid Rad Waste Compactor-01 10B                 THED              RCC Change Fixture Hoist Drive-01 10F                 THED              Refueling Cavity Skimmer Pump-01 12B                 THED              Power Receptacles (Cont. E1. 841')
1M                  THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 02 (CP1-CFAPRP-02) 12M                 THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 04 (CP1-CFAPRP-04) 8H                  THED              RC Pipe Penetration Fan-03 8M                  THED              RC Pipe Penetration Fan-04 5H                  THED              RCP #12 Oil Lift Pump-02 5M                  THED              RCP #14 Oil Lift Pump-04 12H                 THED              Preaccess Filter Train Package Receptacles - 18 6D                  THED              Containment Auxiliary Upper Crane-01(a) 2F                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-13 (PNL C2) 2D                  THED              Containment Access Rotating Platform-01 2M                  THED              Reactor Coolant Drain Tank Pump-02 9F                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-17(PNL C8 & C10) 9M                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-15 (PNL C4 & C6) 3M                  THED              Preaccess Fan-12 (a) Upon implementation and acceptance by Operations of FDA-2002-001062-01; the System Powered is changed from Containment Auxiliary Upper Crane -01 to Containment Building Welding Receptacle El. 905-9.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.8-12                                         Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 7 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                        SYSTEM AND LOCATION                         POWERED 3.3   Device Location -         MCC 1EB3-2 Compartment numbers listed below.
Primary and         -     Unless noted otherwise, both primary and backup breakers Backup Breakers           have identical trip ratings and are located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 1EB3-2           G.E.
COMPT. NO.           BKR. TYPE           SYSTEM POWERED 8RF              THED                JB-1S-10050, Altern. Feed to Motor Operated Valve 1-8702A 1G               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8112 9G               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8701A 9M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8701B 5M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8000A 5G               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6074 4G               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6076 4M               THED (a)            Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6078 2G               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-4696 2M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-4701 3G               THED (a)            Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-5541 (a) 3M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-5543 1M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6083 6F               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8808A 6M               THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-8808C 7M               THED                Containment Ltg. XFMR-18 (PNL SC1 & SC3) 8M               THED                Neutron Detector Well Fan-09 8RM              THED                Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-4075C (a) Primary protection is provided by Gould Tronic TR5 fusible switch with 3.2A fuse.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-13                                     Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 8 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                      SYSTEM AND LOCATION                       POWERED 3.4   Device Location -       MCC 1EB4-2 Compartment numbers listed below.
Primary and        -    Unless noted otherwise, both primary and backup breakers Backup Breakers         have identical trip ratings and are located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 1EB4-2           G.E.
COMPT. NO.           BKR. TYPE         SYSTEM POWERED 1M               THED              JB-1S-1230G, Altern. Feed to Motor Operated Valve 1-8701B 8G               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-8702A 8M               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-8702B 4M               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-8000B 4G               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6075 3G               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6077 3M               THED (a)          Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-6079 2G               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-5562 2M               THED (a)          Motor Operated Valve 1-HV-5563 5F               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-8808B 5M               THED              Motor Operated Valve 1-8808D 6M               THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-19(PNL SC2 & SC4) 7M               THED              Neutron Detector Well Fan-10 (a) Primary protection is provided by Gould Tronic TR5 fusible switch with 3.2A fuse.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-14                                    Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 9 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                              SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                               POWERED
: 4. 480VAC From Panelboards 4.1    Pressurizer Heater Groups A, B, & D
: a. Primary Breakers                 -    General Electric Type TJJ Thermal Magnetic breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -     Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 4 of Panelboards 1EB2-1-2, 1EB3-1-2, 1EB4-1-1, 1EB4-1-2 and Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 5 of Panelboards 1EB2-1-1 and 1EB3-1-1.
: b. Backup Breakers(a)               -    General Electric Type THJS or TJH4S with
                     -                                     longtime and insts. solid state trip devices with 400 Amp. sensor.
Breaker No. & Location           -     Ckt. No. 1 of Panelboards 1EB2-1-1, 1EB2-1-2, 1EB3-1-1, 1EB3-1-2, 1EB4-1-1 and 1EB4-1-2.
4.2    Pressurizer Heater group C
: a. Primary Breakers                  -   General Electric Type THED breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -     For both 1EB1-1-1 & 1EB1-1-2 are located at Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 4.
: b. Backup Breakers                   -   General Electric Type TJJ Thermal Magnetic breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -    Ckt Nos. 2 thru 4 of Switchboards 1EB1-1-1 &
1EB1-1-2.
(a) When a branch circuit breaker is tripped or placed in the off position or there is an open in the heater circuit (e.g., an open heater element), then the breaker settings for the main (feeder) circuit breaker should be adjust-ed per drawing E1-2400-296. If a breaker was previously in the off position and is then placed in the on position, then the breaker settings for the main (feeder) circuit breaker should be adjusted per drawing E1-2400-296.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                            13.8-15                                             Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 10 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                     SYSTEM AND LOCATION                      POWERED 4.3   480VAC From Plant Support Power System Panelboards Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip settings and are located in the same panel board. These breakers are Square D type FC, KH, and LH.
a)    Panelboard 1B11-1-1 Device Location   Breaker Type      System Powered Ckt 2             FC                Containment Elevator CP1-MEELRB-01 Ckt 4             KH                Welding Receptacles Distribution Panel 1B11-1-1-1 Ckt 6             LH                Containment Polar Crane CP1-MESCCP-01 b)    Panelboard 1B11-1-2 Device Location   Breaker Type      System Powered Ckt 2             FC                Fuel Transfer System Rx Side Cont. Pnl for TBX-FHSTTS-02 Ckt 14            FC                Containment Lighting Xfmr CP1-ELTRNT-14 Ckt 16            FC                Manipulator Crane 1-01 TBX-FHSCMC-01 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-16                                   Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 11 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                              SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                               POWERED
: 5. 120V Space Heater Circuits from                       Containment Recirc. Fan and CRDM Vent 480V Switchgears                                      Fan Motor Space Heaters
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers BKR. LOCATION                WESTINGHOUSE
                  & NUMBER                     BKR. TYPE Swgr. 1EB1,                  EB1010 Cubicle 3A, CP1-VAFNAV-01 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 1EB2,                  EB1010 Cubicle 3A, CP1-VAFNAV-02 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 1EB3,                  EB1010 Cubicle 9A, CP1-VAFNAV-03 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 1EB4,                  EB1010 Cubicle 9A, CP1-VAFNAV-04 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 1EB3,                  EB1010 Cubicle 8A, CP1-VAFNCB-01 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 1EB4,                  EB1010 Cubicle 8A, CP1-VAFNCB-02 Space Heater Bkr.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-17                                  Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 12 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                       SYSTEM AND LOCATION                        POWERED
: 6. 125V DC Control Power          Various
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE XED1-1              1,6                          TED XED2-1              3,6                          TED XD2-3               8                            TED 1ED2-1              14,17                        TED 1D2-3               10                           TED 1ED3-1              5                            TED 1ED1-2              7                            TED TBX-WPXILP-01       Main(LBK3)                   FB(Westinghouse)
: 7. 120V AC Control Power from Isolation XFMR TXEC3 & TXEC4
: a. Primary Devices -          N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers -         Square D Type QOB located in Miscellaneous Signal Control Cabinet.
: 1)    Panel Board A, Ckt. Bkr. connected at TB4-13
: 2)    Panel Board B, Ckt. Bkr. connected at TB6-7
: 8. 120V AC Power for Personnel and Emergency Airlocks
: a. Primary Devices -         N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE XEC2                34                           TED XEC1-2              2                            TED CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-18                                Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1a (Page 13 of 13)
Unit 1 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                       SYSTEM AND LOCATION                        POWERED
: 9. 118V AC Control Power
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE 1EC5                8                            TED 1EC6                3                            TED
: 10. Emergency Evacuation System Warning Lights Power
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE XEC3-3              9,10                         FY
: 11. DRPI Data Cabinet Power Supplies
: a. Primary Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE 1C14                1,2                          FA
: b. Backup Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.            CKT.NO.              BREAKER TYPE 1C14                Main Pnl. Bkrs.              FA CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-19                            Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 1 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                 SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                  POWERED
: 1. 6.9 KVAC from Switchgears
: a. Switchgear Bus 2A1                                  RCP #21
: 1)   Primary Breaker 2PCPX1 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 2A1-1 or 2A1-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 2A1-1 c)    Relay 51 for 2A1-2 d)    Relay 86/2A1
: b. Switchgear Bus 2A2                                  RCP #22
: 1)   Primary Breaker 2PCPX2 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 2A2-1 or 2A2-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 2A2-1 c)    Relay 51 for 2A2-2 d)    Relay 86/2A2 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-20                              Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 2 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                 SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                  POWERED
: c. Switchgear Bus 2A3                                  RCP #23
: 1)   Primary Breaker 2PCPX3 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breakers 2A3-1 or 2A3-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 2A3-1 c)    Relay 51 for 2A3-2 d)    Relay 86/2A3
: d. Switchgear Bus 2A4                                  RCP #24
: 1)   Primary Breaker 2PCPX4 a)    Relay 50M1-51 b)    Relay 86M
: 2)   Backup Breaker 2A4-1 or 2A4-2 a)    Relay 51M3 b)    Relay 51 for 2A4-1 c)    Relay 51 for 2A4-2 d)    Relay 86/2A4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-21                              Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 3 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                                       SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                                        POWERED
: 2. 480 VAC from Switchgears 2.1  480V Switchgear 2EB1
: 1. Compartment 3B                                                           Containment Recirc Fan CP2-VAFNAV-01 a)     Primary Breaker 2FNAV1
: 1)     Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNAV1 b)     Backup Breakers 2EB1-1 and BT-2EB13 50 - 51
: 1)     Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNAV1 62 - 1
: 2)      Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNAV1 2.2  480V Switchgear 2EB2
: 1. Compartment 3B                                                           Containment Recirc Fan CP2-VAFNAV-02 a)     Primary Breaker 2FNAV2
: 1)     Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNAV2 b)     Backup Breakers 2EB2-1 and BT-2EB24 50 - 51
: 1)     Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNAV2 62 - 1
: 2)     Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNAV2 2.3  480V Switchgear 2EB3
: 1. Compartment 8B                                                           CRDM Vent Fan CP2-VAFNCB-01 a)     Primary Breaker 2FNCB1
: 1)     Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNCB1 b)     Backup Breakers 1EB3-1 and BT-1EB13 50 - 51
: 1)     Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNCB1 62 - 1
: 2)     Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNCB1
: 2. Compartment 9B                                                           Containment Recirc Fan CP2-VAFNAV-03 a)     Primary Breaker 2FNAV3
: 1)     Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNAV3 b)     Backup Breakers 2EB3-1 and BT-2EB13 50 - 51
: 1)     Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNAV3 62 - 1
: 2)     Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNAV3 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                               13.8-22                                     Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 4 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                                                    SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                                                     POWERED 2.4  480V Switchgear 2EB4
: 1. Compartment 8B                                                         CRDM Vent Fan CP2-VAFNCB-02 a)    Primary Breaker 2FNCB2
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNCB2 b)    Backup Breakers 2EB4-1 and BT-2EB24 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNCB2 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNCB2
: 2. Compartment 9B                                                         Containment Recirc Fan CP2-VAFNAV-04 a)    Primary Breaker 2FNAV4
: 1)    Relay: Amptector Trip Unit of Breaker 2FNAV4 b)    Backup Breakers 2EB4-1 and BT-2EB24 50 - 51
: 1)    Long Time and Instantaneous Relay ------------------------
2FNAV4 62 - 1
: 2)    Time Delay Relay ------------------------
2FNAV4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                      13.8-23                                        Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 5 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                      SYSTEM AND LOCATION                       POWERED
: 3. 480VAC from Motor Control Centers 3.1   Device Location    -    MCC 2EB1-2 Compartment Numbers listed below.
Primary and        -    Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and Backup Breakers         are in the same MCC Compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 2EB1-2          G.E.
COMPT. NO.          BKR. TYPE         SYSTEM POWERED 4G              THED              Motor Operated Valve 2-TV-4691 4M              THED              Motor Operated Valve 2-TV-4693 3F              THED              Containment Drain Tank Pump-03 9H              THED              Reactor Cavity Sump Pump-01 9M              THED              Reactor Cavity Sump Pump-02 7H              THED              Containment Sump #1 Pump-01 7M              THED              Containment Sump #1 Pump-02 6H              THED              RCP #21 Motor Space Heater-01 6M              THED              RCP #23 Motor Space Heater-03 8B              THED              Incore Detector Drive "A" 8D              THED              Incore Detector Drive "B" 7B              THED              Incore Detector Drive "F" 3B              THED              Stud Tensioner Hoist Outlet-01 7D              THED              Hydraulic Deck Lift-01 4B              THED              Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Hoist Receptacle-42 8H              THED              RC Pipe Penetration Cooling Unit-01 8M              THED              RC Pipe Penetration Cooling Unit-02 5H              THED              RCP #21 Oil Lift Pump-01 5M              THED              RCP #23 Oil Lift Pump-03 10B             THED              Preaccess Filter Train Package Receptacle-17 10F             THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 01 (CP2-CFAPRP-01) 12M             THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 03 (CP2-CFAPRP-03) 12H             THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-28 (PNL 2C11 & 2C12) 12B             THED              Personnel Air Lock Hydraulic Unit #2 (CP2-BSAPPA-02M) 2M              THED              RC Drain Tank Pump No. 1 2F              THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-16 (PNL 2C7 & 2C9) 1M              THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-12 (PNL 2LPC1 & 2LPC5) 3M              THED              Preaccess Fan No. 11 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-24                                   Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 6 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                            SYSTEM AND LOCATION                             POWERED 3.2    Device Location       -     MCC 2EB2-2 Compartment Numbers listed below.
Primary and Backup    -     Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and are Breakers                    located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 2EB2-2              G.E.
COMPT. NO.              BKR. TYPE         SYSTEM POWERED 4G                  THED              Motor Operated Valve 2-TV-4692 4M                  THED              Motor Operated Valve 2-TV-4694 3F                  THED              Containment Drain Tank Pump-04 7H                  THED              Containment Sump No. 2 Pump-03 7M                  THED              Containment Sump No. 2 Pump-04 6H                  THED              RCP #22 Motor Space Heater-02 6M                  THED              RCP #24 Motor Space Heater-04 5B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "C" 2B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "D" 7B                  THED              Incore Detector Drive "E" 5D                  THED              Containment Fuel Storage Crane-01 3B                  THED              Stud Tensioner Hoist Outlet-02 10B                 THED              RCC Change Fixture Hoist Drive-01 10F                 THED              Refueling Cavity Skimmer Pump-01 12B                 THED              Power Receptacles (Cont. E1. 841')
1M                  THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 02 (CP2-CFAPRP-02) 12M                 THED              S.G. Wet Layup Circ. Pump 04 (CP2-CFAPRP-04) 8H                  THED              RC Pipe Penetration Fan-03 8M                  THED              RC Pipe Penetration Fan-04 5H                  THED              RCP #22 Oil Lift Pump-02 5M                  THED              RCP #24 Oil Lift Pump-04 12H                 THED              Preaccess Filter Train Package Receptacles - 18 6D                  THED              Containment Auxiliary Upper Crane-01 (a) 2F                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-13 (PNL 2LPC2) 2D                  THED              Containment Access Rotating Platform-01 2M                  THED              Reactor Coolant Drain Tank Pump-02 9F                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-17 (PNL 2C8 & 2C10) 9M                  THED              Containment Ltg. XFMR-15 (PNL 2LPC4 & 2LPC6) 3M                  THED              Preaccess Fan-12 (a) Upon implementation and acceptance by Operations of FDA-2002-001062-05; the Systems Powered is changed from Containment Auxiliary Upper Crane -01 to Containment Building Welding Receptacle El. 905-9.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                           13.8-25                                         Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 7 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                      SYSTEM AND LOCATION                       POWERED 3.3   Device Location -       MCC 2EB3-2 Compartment numbers listed below.
Primary and Backup - Unless noted otherwise, both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and are located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 2EB3-2           G.E.
COMPT. NO.           BKR. TYPE          SYSTEM POWERED 8RF              THED               Altern. Feed to Motor Operated Valve 2-8702A 1G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8112 9G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8701A 9M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8701B 5M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8000A 5G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6074 4G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6076 4M               THED (a)           Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6078 2G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-4696 2M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-4701 3G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-5541 3M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-5543 1M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6083 6F               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8808A 6M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8808C 7M               THED               Containment Ltg. XFMR-18 (PNL 2SC1 & 2SC3) 8M               THED               Neutron Detector Well Fan-09 8RM              THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-4075C (a) Primary protection is provided by Gould Tronic TR5 fusible switch with 3.2A fuse.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-26                                   Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 8 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                       SYSTEM AND LOCATION                        POWERED 3.4   Device Location -        MCC 2EB4-2 Compartment numbers listed below.
Primary and Backup - Unless noted otherwise, both primary and backup breakers have identical trip ratings and are located in the same MCC compt. These breakers are General Electric type THED with thermal-magnetic trip elements.
MCC 2EB4-2           G.E.
COMPT. NO.           BKR. TYPE          SYSTEM POWERED 1M               THED               Altern. Feed to Motor Operated Valve 2-8701B 8G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8702A 8M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8702B 4M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8000B 4G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6075 3G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6077 3M               THED (a)           Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-6079 (a) 2G               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-5562 (a)         Motor Operated Valve 2-HV-5563 2M               THED 5F               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8808B 5M               THED               Motor Operated Valve 2-8808D 6M               THED               Containment Ltg. XFMR-19 (PNL 2SC2 & 2SC4) 7M               THED               Neutron Detector Well Fan-10 (a) Primary protection is provided by Gould Tronic TR5 fusible switch with 3.2A fuse.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.8-27                                     Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 9 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                              SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                               POWERED
: 4. 480VAC From Panelboards 4.1    Pressurizer Heater Groups A, B, & D
: a. Primary Breakers                 -    General Electric Type TJJ Thermal Magnetic breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -     Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 4 of Panelboards 2EB2-1-2, 2EB3-1-2, 2EB4-1-1, 2EB4-1-2 and Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 5 of Panelboards 2EB2-1-1 and 2EB3-1-1.
: b. Backup Breakers(a)               -    General Electric Type THJS or TJH4S with longtime and insts. solid state trip devices with 400 Amp. sensor.
Breaker No. & Location           -     Ckt. No. 1 of Panelboards 2EB2-1-1, 2EB2-1-2, 2EB3-1-1, 2EB3-1-2, 2EB4-1-1 and 2EB4-1-2.
4.2    Pressurizer Heater group C
: a. Primary Breakers                 -    General Electric Type THED breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -     For both 2EB1-1-1 & 2EB1-1-2 are located at Ckt. Nos. 2 thru 4.
: b. Backup Breakers                  -    General Electric Type TJJ Thermal Magnetic breakers.
Breaker No. & Location           -    Ckt Nos. 2 thru 4 of Switchboards 2EB1-1-1 &
2EB1-1-2.
(a) When a branch circuit breaker is tripped or placed in the off position or there is an open in the heater circuit (e.g., an open heater element), then the breaker settings for the main (feeder) circuit breaker should be adjust-ed per drawing E2-2400-296. If a breaker was previously in the off position and is then placed in the on position, then the breaker settings for the main (feeder) circuit breaker should be adjusted per drawing E2-2400-296.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                            13.8-28                                             Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 10 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                 SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                  POWERED 4.3      480VAC From Plant Support Power System Panelboards Both primary and backup breakers have identical trip settings and are located in the same panelboard (with the exception of Ckt 1 / Bkr-1 located in Panelboard 2B10-1-2 and Ckt 1 / Bkr-2 located in Panelboard 2B10-1-2a). These breakers are Square D type FH, KH, FA, and LH.
a)      Panelboard 2B10-1-2 Device Location        Breaker Type       System Powered Ckt 2                  FH                 Containment Elevator CP2-MEELRB-01 Ckt 4                  KH                 Containment Welding Receptacles Ckt 6                  LH                 Containment Polar Crane CP2-MESCCP-01 Ckt 1 / Bkr-1          LH                 Containment Jib Crane CP2-MEMECA-16 Disconnect Switches CP2-ECDSNC-15&16 b)      Panelboard 2B10-1-1-1 Device Location        Breaker Type       System Powered Ckt 4 (b)              FH                 Personnel Airlock Hydraulic Unit #2 (CP2-BSAPPA-02M)
Ckt 6                  FH                 Fuel Transfer System Rx Side Cont. Pnl for TCX-FHSTTS-02 Ckt 10                 FH                 Containment Lighting Xfmr CP2-ELTRNT-14 Ckt 8                  FH                 Manipulator Crane 1-01 TXC-FHSCMC-01 c)      Panelboard 2B10-1-2a Device Location        Breaker Type       System Powered Ckt 1/Bkr-2            FA                 Containment Jib Crane CP2-MEMECA-16 Disconnect Switches CP2-ECDSNC-15 &16 (b) Breakers become electrical penetration overcurrent protection devices only when transfer switch CP2-BSTSNB-01 is aligned to plant support power panel 2B10-1-1-1/04/BKR-1 and 2. Transfer switch CP2-BSTSNB-01 is normally aligned to MCC 2EB1-2/12B/BKR-1 and 2.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                             13.8-29                                         Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 11 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                                              SYSTEM AND LOCATION                                               POWERED
: 5. 120V Space Heater Circuits from 480V                  Containment Recirc. Fan and CRDM Vent Switchgears                                           Fan Motor Space Heaters
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers BKR. LOCATION               WESTINGHOUSE
                   & NUMBER                    BKR. TYPE Swgr. 2EB1,                 EB1010 Cubicle 3A, CP2-VAFNAV-01 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 2EB2,                 EB1010 Cubicle 3A, CP2-VAFNAV-02 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 2EB3,                 EB1010 Cubicle 9A, CP2-VAFNAV-03 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 2EB4,                 EB1010 Cubicle 9A, CP2-VAFNAV-04 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 2EB3,                 EB1010 Cubicle 8A, CP2-VAFNCB-01 Space Heater Bkr.
Swgr. 2EB4,                 EB1010 Cubicle 8A, CP2-VAFNCB-02 Space Heater Bkr.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.8-30                                  Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 12 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                            SYSTEM AND LOCATION                             POWERED
: 6. 125V DC Control Power              Various
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.              CKT. NO.             BREAKER TYPE XED1-1               6 (c)                        TED (c)
XED2-1               6                            TED 2ED2-1               11,17                        TED 2ED1-1               11                           TED 2D2-3                6,10,11                      TED (a) 2D2-2                9                            TED (a) 2ED2-2               12                           TED (a) 2ED3-1               5                            TED 2ED1-2               7,8                          TED (a)
TBX-WPXILP-01        Main(LBK3) (c)               FB(Westinghouse)
: 7. 120V AC Control Power from Isolation XFMR TXEC3 & TXEC4
: a. Primary Devices -           N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers -           Square D Type QOB located in Miscellaneous Signal Control Cabinet.
: 1)     Panel Board A, Ckt. Bkr. connected at TB3-5
: 2)     Panel Board B, Ckt. Bkr. connected at TB5-1 (a) Upon implementation and acceptance by Operations of FDA-2002-002756-01; breakers 2D2-3/11, 2D2-2/9, 2ED2-2/12, and 2ED1-2/8 are no longer required meet the requirements of TRM 13.8.32.
(c) These circuits provide backup protection to both Units 1 and 2. Testing of these breakers is controlled by Unit 1 surveillance program.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.8-31                                  Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 13 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                      SYSTEM AND LOCATION                       POWERED
: 8. 120 AC Power for Personnel and Emergency Airlocks
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.          CKT. NO.          BREAKER TYPE XEC1              12                       TED XEC2-2            3                        TED
: 9. 118V AC Control Power
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers GENERAL ELECTRIC PANELBOARD NO.          CKT. NO.          BREAKER TYPE 2C2               22                       TED (a) 2PC1              10                       TED (a) 2PC4              10                       TED (a) 2EC1              7                        TED (a) 2EC2              4,7                      TED(a) 2EC5              8                        TED 2EC6              3,8                      TED (a)
(a) Upon completion and acceptance by Operations of FDA-2002-002756-01; breakers 2C2/22, 2PC1/10, 2PC4/10, 2EC1/7, 2EC2/4, 2EC2/7, and 2EC6/8 are no longer required to meet the requirements of TRM 13.8.32.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                13.8-32                              Revision 66

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TR 13.8.32 Table 13.8.32-1b (Page 14 of 14)
Unit 2 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protective Devices DEVICE NUMBER                     SYSTEM AND LOCATION                      POWERED
: 10. Emergency Evacuation System Warning Lights Power
: a. Primary Devices - N/A (Fuse)
: b. Backup Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.          CKT. NO.          BREAKER TYPE XEC4-3             9,10                     FY
: 11. DRPI Data Cabinet Power Supplies
: a. Primary Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.          CKT. NO.          BREAKER TYPE 2C14               1,2                      FA
: b. Backup Breakers SQUARE D PANELBOARD NO.          CKT. NO.          BREAKER TYPE 2C14               Main Pnl. Bkrs.          FA CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.8-33                              Revision 66

Decay Time TR 13.9.31 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.31 Decay Time TR LCO 13.9.31      The reactor shall be subcritical for at least 75 hours.
APPLICABILITY:      During movement of irradiated fuel in the reactor vessel.
ACTIONS CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION                    COMPLETION TIME A. Reactor subcritical for less A.1 Suspend all operations involving Immediately than 75 hours.                    movement of irradiated fuel in the reactor vessel.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                       FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.31.1     Determine the reactor has been subcritical for at least    Prior to movement 75 hours by verification of the date and time of           of irradiated fuel in subcriticality.                                            the reactor vessel.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  13.9-1                                    Revision 66

Refueling Operations / Communications TR 13.9.32 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.32 Refueling Operations / Communications TR LCO 13.9.32       Direct communications shall be maintained between the control room and personnel at the refueling station.
APPLICABILITY:       During CORE ALTERATIONS.
ACTIONS CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION                COMPLETION TIME A. No direct communications        A.1 Suspend all CORE                 Immediately between the control room and         ALTERATIONS.
personnel at the refueling station.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.32.1     Verify direct communications between the control room Once within 1 hour and personnel at the refueling station.                  prior to the start of CORE ALTERATIONS AND 12 hours CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.9-2                                  Revision 66

Refueling Machine TR 13.9.33 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.33 Refueling Machine TR LCO 13.9.33       The refueling machine main hoist and auxiliary monorail hoist shall be used for movement of drive rods or fuel assemblies and shall be OPERABLE with:
: a. The refueling machine main hoist used for movement of fuel assemblies having:
: 1.      A minimum capacity of 2850 pounds, and
: 2.      An overload cutoff limit less than or equal to 2800 pounds.
: b. The auxiliary monorail hoist used for latching, unlatching and movement of control rod drive shafts having:
: 1.      A minimum capacity of 610 pounds, and
: 2.      A load indicator which shall be used to prevent lifting loads in excess of 600 pounds.
APPLICABILITY:       During movement of fuel assemblies and/or latching, unlatching or movement of control rod drive shafts within the reactor vessel ACTIONS CONDITION                      REQUIRED ACTION                    COMPLETION TIME A. Requirements for refueling A.1 Suspend use of any inoperable Immediately machine main hoist and/or         refueling machine main hoist and/
auxiliary monorail hoist          or auxiliary monorail hoist from OPERABILITY not                   operations involving the satisfied.                        movement of fuel assemblies and/or latching, unlatching or movement of control rod drive shafts within the reactor vessel.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.9-3                                    Revision 66

Refueling Machine TR 13.9.33 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                        FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.33.1   The refueling machine main hoist used for movement of       Once within 100 fuel assemblies within the reactor vessel shall be          hours prior to the demonstrated OPERABLE by performing a load test of          start of such at least 2850 pounds and demonstrating an automatic         operations load cutoff when the main hoist load exceeds 2800 pounds.
TRS 13.9.33.2   The auxiliary monorail hoist and associated load            Once within 100 indicator used for latching, unlatching or movement of      hours prior to the control rod drive shafts within the reactor vessel shall be start of such demonstrated OPERABLE by performing a load test of          operations at least 610 pounds.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 13.9-4                                    Revision 66

Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas TR 13.9.34 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.34 Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas TR LCO 13.9.34      Loads in excess of 2150 pounds shall be prohibited from travel over fuel assemblies in a storage pool.
APPLICABILITY:      With fuel assemblies in the storage pool.
ACTIONS CONDITION                            REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Technical Requirement not A.1. Place the crane load in a safe                       Immediately met.                                  condition.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.34.1    --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when the hoist is being used to move loads over fuel assemblies in a spent fuel storage pool.
Each hoist load indicator shall be demonstrated                            7 days OPERABLE by performing a load test of at least 2200 pounds.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                         13.9-5                                         Revision 66

Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods TR 13.9.35 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.35 Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods TR LCO 13.9.35      At least 23 feet of water shall be maintained over the top of the irradiated fuel assemblies within the reactor vessel.
APPLICABILITY:      During movement of control rods within the reactor vessel while in MODE 6.
ACTIONS CONDITION                        REQUIRED ACTION                COMPLETION TIME A. Technical Requirement not      A.1 Suspend all operations involving Immediately met.                                 movement of control rods within the reactor vessel.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.35.1    The water level shall be determined to be at least its     24 hours minimum required depth.
AND Once within 2 hours prior to the movement of control rods in MODE 6 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   13.9-6                                   Revision 66

Fuel Storage Area Water Level TR 13.9.36 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TR 13.9.36 Fuel Storage Area Water Level TR LCO 13.9.36         The fuel storage area water level shall be t 23 ft over the top of irradiated fuel assemblies seated in the storage racks.
APPLICABILITY:         Whenever irradiated fuel assemblies are in the storage racks.
                                                                   - NOTE -
While This LCO is not met, do not commence crane operations with loads over irradiated fuel in the storage racks.
ACTIONS CONDITION                              REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Fuel storage area water            A.1 Suspend crane operations with                   4 hours level < 23 feet above                    loads in the affected fuel storage irradiated fuel assemblies               areas and restore the water level seated in the storage racks.             to within its limit.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                      FREQUENCY TRS 13.9.36.1       Verify the fuel storage area water level t 23 ft above the 7 days irradiated fuel assemblies seated in the storage racks.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                            13.9-7                                              Revision 66

Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TR 13.10.31 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TR 13.10.31 Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TR LCO 13.10.31             Pursuant to Technical Specification 5.5.12a, the explosive gas monitoring instrumentation channels shown in Table 13.10.31-1 shall be OPERABLE with their Alarm/Trip Setpoints set to ensure that the limits specified in TR 13.10.34 are not exceeded.
APPLICABILITY:              During Waste Gas Holdup System operation on the inservice recombiner.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry is allowed for each recombiner.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. An explosive gas                       A.1 Declare channel inoperable.                     Immediately monitoring instrumentation channel Alarm/Trip Setpoint less conservative than required.
B. Any required channel                   B.1 Restore the inoperable channel                  30 days inoperable.                                 to OPERABLE status.
C. No inlet oxygen monitor                C.1 Verify the associated inlet                     Immediately channel OPERABLE on the                     hydrogen monitor(s) OPERABLE.
inservice recombiner.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.10-1                                              Revision 65

Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TR 13.10.31 ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                    REQUIRED ACTION               COMPLETION TIME D. No outlet oxygen monitor  D.1 Suspend operation of the Waste Immediately channel OPERABLE on the        Gas Holdup System.
inservice recombiner.
OR D.2 Take and analyze grab samples    Once per 24 hours while maintaining oxygen < 1%
by volume.
E. Less than the required    E.1 Suspend oxygen supply to the     Immediately hydrogen monitor Channels      affected recombiner(s).
OPERABLE on the inservice recombiner. AND OR                        E.2.1 Suspend addition of waste gas Immediately to the system.
No inlet oxygen monitor channel and no outlet         OR oxygen monitor channel OPERABLE on the           E.2.2 Take and analyze grab          Once per 4 hours during inservice recombiner.            samples while maintaining     degassing oxygen < 1% by volume.
OR                                                             OR No inlet oxygen monitor                                        Once per 24 hours channel and no inlet                                           during other operations hydrogen monitor channel OPERABLE on the inservice recombiner.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               13.10-2                               Revision 65

Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TR 13.10.31 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                    FREQUENCY TRS 13.10.31.1 Perform a CHANNEL CHECK of each explosive gas          Once per 24 hours monitoring instrumentation channel shown in           during Waste Gas Table 13.10.31-1.                                     Holdup System operation AND Once per 24 hours prior to Waste Gas Holdup System operation.
TRS 13.10.31.2 Perform a CHANNEL OPERATIONAL TEST of each             31 days explosive gas monitoring instrumentation channel shown in Table 13.10.31-1.
TRS 13.10.31.3 Perform a CHANNEL CALIBRATION of each explosive 92 days gas monitoring instrumentation channel shown in Table 13.10.31-1. This shall include the use of standard gas samples in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              13.10-3                                Revision 65

Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TR 13.10.31 Table 13.10.31-1 Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation
* INSTRUMENT                     REQUIRED CHANNELS
: 1. Waste Gas Holdup System Explosive Gas Monitoring System
: a. Hydrogen Monitors                       1 per recombiner
: b. Oxygen Monitors                         2 per recombiner
* One hydrogen and two oxygen monitors are required to be OPERABLE for the operating recombiner during Waste Gas HOLDUP System operation CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM             13.10-4                                 Revision 65

Gas Storage Tanks TR 13.10.32 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TR 13.10.32 Gas Storage Tanks TR LCO 13.10.32             Pursuant to TS 5.5.12b, the quantity of radioactivity contained in each gas storage tank shall be d 200,000 Curies of noble gases (considered as Xe-133 equivalent).
APPLICABILITY:              At all times.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate condition entry allowed for each gas storage tank.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Radioactivity in one or more A.1 Suspend all additions of                                  Immediately storage tank(s) not within                  radioactive material to the limit.                                      tank(s).
AND A.2 Reduce radioactivity in tank(s) to 48 hours within limit.
AND A.3 ------------------------------------------
                                                               - NOTE -
Required Action A.3 must be completed whenever Condition A is entered.
Describe events leading to                    Per TS 5.6.3 exceeding limits in Radioactive Effluent Release Report.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.10-5                                              Revision 65

Gas Storage Tanks TR 13.10.32 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                     FREQUENCY TRS 13.10.32.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when radioactive materials are being added to the tank.
Determine the quantity of radioactive material in each                    Once within 92 days gas storage tank to verify within limit.                                  after the addition of radioactive material being added to the tank, but not more often than 92 days CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.10-6                                           Revision 65

Liquid Holdup Tanks TR 13.10.33 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TR 13.10.33 Liquid Holdup Tanks TR LCO 13.10.33             Pursuant to TS 5.5.12c, the quantity of radioactive material in each outdoor unprotected tank shall be limited to d10 Curies, excluding tritium and dissolved or entrained noble gases.
APPLICABILITY:              At all times.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Separate Condition entry allowed for each tank.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Quantity of radioactive                A.1 Suspend all additions of                        Immediately.
material in one or more                     radioactive material to the tanks exceeds limits.                       tank(s).
AND A.2 Reduce quantity of radioactive                  48 hours material in tank(s) to within limits.
AND A.3 -------------------------------------------
                                                               - NOTE -
Required Action A.3 must be completed whenever Condition A is entered.
Describe events leading to                    Per TS 5.6.3 exceeding limits in Radioactive Effluent Release Report.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.10-7                                              Revision 65

Liquid Holdup Tanks TR 13.10.33 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                    FREQUENCY TRS 13.10.33.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            - NOTE -
Only required to be performed when radioactive materials are being added to the tank.
Analyze a representative sample of each tanks                            7 days contents to verify within limits.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                       13.10-8                                         Revision 65

Explosive Gas Mixture TR 13.10.34 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TR 13.10.34 Explosive Gas Mixture TR LCO 13.10.34             Pursuant to TS 5.5.12a, the concentration of oxygen in the Waste Gas Holdup system shall be d 3% by volume whenever the hydrogen concentration is > 4% by volume.
APPLICABILITY:              At all times.
ACTIONS
                                                          - NOTE -
Only applicable when hydrogen concentration in the Waste Gas Holdup system is > 4% by volume.
CONDITION                                REQUIRED ACTION                             COMPLETION TIME A. Oxygen concentration in                A.1 Reduce oxygen concentration to 48 hours Waste Gas Holdup system                     within limits.
     > 3% by volume and d 4%
by volume.
B. Oxygen concentration in                B.1 Suspend all additions of waste                  Immediately Waste Gas Holdup System                     gases to the system.
     > 4% by volume.
AND B.2 Reduce oxygen concentration to Immediately d4% by volume.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                                13.10-9                                              Revision 65

Explosive Gas Mixture TR 13.10.34 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                               FREQUENCY TRS 13.10.34.1 Monitor the hydrogen and oxygen in the Waste Gas  As specified in Holdup Systems as specified by TR 13.10.31.      TR 13.10.31 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM           13.10-10                            Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5 15.0 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS 15.5 Programs and Manuals TR 15.5.17  TRM - Administrative Control Process
: a. Introduction CPSES has relocated certain information from the Technical Specifications to a separate controlled document based on the NUMARC Technical Specification Improvement Program, the Westinghouse Owners Group MERITS Program, and the Commission's Interim Policy Statement for improvement of Technical Specifications for nuclear power plants (52 FR 3788 of February 6, 1987). This information is now contained in a separate document to be called the CPSES Technical Requirements Manual (TRM). The following is a description of the administrative program for control, distribution, updating, and amending the information contained in the TRM. The Explosive Gas and Storage Tank Radioactivity Monitoring Program, as required by TS 5.5.12, is contained in Section 13.10 of the TRM.
: b. Document Control The TRM is considered a licensing basis document and as such, overall control of the document is addressed by the site-wide procedures for licensing document control.
: c. Document Distribution The TRM is considered a controlled document and distribution is controlled by site wide procedures for licensing basis document control.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                15.0-1                                 Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5
: d. Changes / Deletions to the TRM Changes to the TRM are controlled by the procedure on licensing document change control. This procedure addresses the administrative requirements necessary to change/amend CPSES licensing documents (e.g., Fire Protection Report, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual). For changes to the TRM, the procedure requires initiation of a Licensing Document Change Request (LDCR). The LDCR is the mechanism whereby changes are tracked to ensure that appropriate reviews, approvals, and signatures are obtained. TRM changes are evaluated per 10CFR50.59. TRM changes require a review by SORC and the approval of the Plant Manager. Changes to the TRM must comply with the requirements of Technical Specification 5.5.17 of the CPSES Units 1 and 2 Technical Specifications.
: e. Plant Changes That May Affect the TRM Changes made at CPSES have the potential to affect (or be affected by) the TRM. These include items such as design modifications, procedure changes, other licensing document changes, etc. When TRM changes are required, the changes should be initiated and approved consistent with the plant activity (e.g., modification, procedure change etc.).
: f. Distribution of TRM Changes / Deletions Changes to the TRM will be issued on a replacement page basis to controlled document holders promptly following approval of the change.
: g. Report of TRM Changes / Deletions to the NRC Changes to the TRM will be reported to the NRC on the same frequency as the FSAR.
Proposed TRM changes that are determined to require prior NRC approval (as defined by 10CFR50.59) will either not be made or will be submitted to the NRC for prior review and approval.
TR 15.5.31  Snubber Augmented Inservice Inspection Program
: a. Inspection Types As used in this specification, type of snubber shall mean snubbers of the same design and manufacturer, irrespective of capacity.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 15.0-2                                Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5
: b. Visual Inspections Snubbers are categorized as inaccessible or accessible during reactor operation. Each of these groups (inaccessible and accessible) may be inspected independently. The first inservice visual inspection of each type of snubber shall be performed after 2 months but within 10 months of commencing POWER OPERATION and shall include all snubbers. If all snubbers of each type on any system are found OPERABLE during the first inservice visual inspection, the second inservice visual inspection on that type shall be performed at the first refueling outage. Otherwise subsequent visual inspections of a given system shall be performed in accordance with the following schedule:
No. of Inoperable Snubbers of Each Type on any System per          Subsequent Visual Inspection Period*                   Inspection Period**
0,1                                  12 months +/- 25%
2                                    6 months +/- 25%
3,4                                  124 days +/- 25%
5,6,7                                62 days +/- 25%
8 or more                            31 days +/- 25%
* If one or more snubbers of each type on any sys-tem are found inoperable during the first inservice visual inspection, the second inservice visual in-spection on that type shall be performed no later than the first refueling outage or the subsequent visual inspection period, whichever comes first.
                       ** The inspection interval for each type of snubber shall not be lengthened more than one step at a time unless a generic problem has been identified and corrected; in that event the inspection interval may be lengthened one step the first time and two steps thereafter if no inoperable snubbers of that type are found on any system.
Visual inspection intervals following the second refueling outage shall be determined based upon the criteria provided in the Table 15.5.31-1.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  15.0-3                                 Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5
: c. Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria Visual inspections shall verify that: (1) there are no visible indications of damage or impaired OPERABILITY, (2) attachments to the foundation or supporting structure are secure, and (3) fasteners for attachment of the snubber to the component and to the snubber anchorage are secure.
Snubbers which appear inoperable as a result of visual inspections may be determined OPERABLE for the purpose of establishing the next visual inspection interval, provided that: (1) the cause of the rejection is clearly established and remedied for that particular snubber and for other snubbers irrespective of type that may be generically susceptible; or (2) the affected snubber is functionally tested in the as-found condition and determined OPERABLE per 15.5.31f, the Functional Test Acceptance Criteria. All snubbers connected to an inoperable common hydraulic fluid reservoir shall be counted as inoperable snubbers.
: d. Transient Event Inspection An inspection shall be performed of all snubbers attached to sections of systems that have experienced unexpected, potentially damaging transients as determined from a review of operational data. A visual inspection of those systems shall be performed within 6 months following such an event. In addition to satisfying the visual inspection acceptance criteria, freedom-of-motion of mechanical snubbers shall be verified using at least one of the following: (1) manually induced snubber movement; or (2) evaluation of in-place snubber piston setting; or (3) stroking the mechanical snubber through its full range of travel.
: e. Functional Tests During the first refueling shutdown and at least once per 18 months thereafter during shutdown, a representative sample of snubbers of each type shall be tested using one of the following sample plans. The sample plan for each type shall be selected prior to the test period and cannot be changed during the test period. The NRC Regional Administrator shall be notified in writing of the sample plan selected for each snubber type prior to the test period or the sample plan used in the prior test period shall be implemented:
: 1.       At least 10% of the total of each type of snubber shall be functionally tested either in-place or in a bench test. For each snubber of a type that does not meet the functional test acceptance criteria of Test/Inspection TR3.1f, an additional 10% of that type of snubber shall be functionally tested until no more failures are found or until all snubbers of that type have been functionally tested; or (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  15.0-4                                  Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5
: 2.      A representative sample of each type of snubber shall be functionally tested in accordance with Figure 15.5.31-1. "C" is the total number of snubbers of a type found not meeting the acceptance requirements of 15.5.31f. The cumulative number of snubbers of a type tested is denoted by "N". At the end of each day's testing, the new values of "N" and "C" (previous day's total plus current day's increments) shall be plotted on Figure 15.5.31-1.
If at any time the point plotted falls in the "Accept" region, testing of snubbers of that type may be terminated. When the point plotted lies in the "Continue Testing" region, additional snubbers of that type shall be tested until the point falls in the "Accept" region, or all the snubbers of that type have been tested.
: f. Functional Test Acceptance Criteria The snubber functional test shall verify that:
: 1.      Activation (restraining action) is achieved within the specified range in both tension and compression;
: 2.      Snubber bleed, or release rate where required, is present in both tension and compression, within the specified range;
: 3.      For mechanical snubbers, the force required to initiate or maintain motion of the snubber is within the specified range in both directions of travel.
Testing methods may be used to measure parameters indirectly or parameters other than those specified if those results can be correlated to the specified parameters through established methods.
: g. Functional Test Failure Analysis An engineering evaluation shall be made of each failure to meet the functional test acceptance criteria to determine the cause of the failure.
The results of this evaluation shall be used, if applicable, in selecting snubbers to be tested in an effort to determine the OPERABILITY of other snubbers irrespective of type which may be subject to the same failure mode.
For the snubbers found inoperable, an engineering evaluation shall be performed on the components to which the inoperable snubbers are attached. The purpose of this engineering evaluation shall be to determine if the components to which the inoperable snubbers are attached were adversely affected by the inoperability of the snubbers in order to ensure that the component remains capable of meeting the designed service.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                15.0-5                                     Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5 If any snubber selected for functional testing either fails to lock up or fails to move, i.e., frozen in-place, the cause will be evaluated and, if caused by manufacturer or design deficiency, all snubbers of the same type subject to the same defect shall be functionally tested. This testing requirement shall be independent of the requirements stated in 15.5.31e for snubbers not meeting the functional test acceptance criteria.
: h. Functional Testing of Repaired and Replaced Snubbers Snubbers which fail the visual inspection or the functional test acceptance criteria shall be repaired or replaced. Replacement snubbers and snubbers which have repairs which might affect the functional test results shall be tested to meet the functional test criteria before installation in the unit. Mechanical snubbers shall have met the acceptance criteria subsequent to their most recent service, and the freedom-of-motion test must have been performed within 12 months before being installed in the unit.
: i. Snubber Service Life Program The service life of hydraulic and mechanical snubbers shall be monitored to ensure that the service life is not exceeded between surveillance inspections. The maximum expected service life for various seals, springs, and other critical parts shall be determined and established based on engineering information and shall be extended or shortened based on monitored test results and failure history. Critical parts shall be replaced so that the maximum service life will not be exceeded during a period when the snubber is required to be OPERABLE. Part replacement shall be documented and the documentation shall be retained in accordance with FSAR 17.2.17.2.12.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                15.0-6                                    Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5 Table 15.5.31-1 Number of Unacceptable Snubbers POPULATION OR              COLUMN A               COLUMN B                  COLUMN C CATEGORY            EXTEND INTERVAL REPEAT INTERVAL REDUCE INTERVAL (NOTES 1 & 2)           (NOTES 3 & 6)          (NOTES 4 & 6)            (NOTES 5 & 6) 1                      0                       0                         1 80                     0                       0                         2 100                     0                       1                         4 150                     0                       3                         8 200                    2                        5                        13 300                    5                       12                        25 400                    8                       18                        36 500                    12                      24                        48 750                    20                      40                        78 1000                    29                      56                       109 or greater Note 1:     The next visual inspection interval for a snubber population or category size shall be determined based upon the previous inspection interval and the number of unacceptable snubbers found during that interval. Snubbers may be categorized, based upon their accessibility during power operation, as accessible or inaccessible. These categories may be examined separately or jointly. However, the licensee must make and document that decision before any inspection and shall use that decision as the basis upon which to determine the next inspection interval for that category.
Note 2:     Interpolation between population or category sizes and the number of unacceptable snubbers is permissible. Use next lower integer for the value of the limit for Columns A, B, or C if that integer includes a fractional value of unacceptable snubbers as determined by interpolation.
Note 3:     If the number of unacceptable snubbers is equal to or less than the number in Column A, the next inspection interval may be twice the previous interval but not greater than 48 months.
Note 4:     If the number of unacceptable snubbers is equal to or less than the number in Column B, but greater than the number in Column A, the next inspection interval shall be the same as the previous interval.
Note 5:     If the number of unacceptable snubbers is equal to or greater than the number in Column C, the next inspection interval shall be two-thirds of the previous interval. However, if the number of unacceptable snubbers is less than the number in Column C but greater than the number in Column B, the next interval shall be reduced proportionally by interpolation, that is, the previous interval shall be reduced by a factor that is one-third of the ratio of the difference between the number of unacceptable snubbers found during the previous interval and the number in Column B to the difference in the numbers in Columns B and C.
Note 6:     The provisions of Specification 4.0.2 are applicable for all inspection intervals up to and including 48 months.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                        15.0-7                                              Revision 65

Programs and Manuals 15.5 10 9
8 7
6 C    5 CONTINUE TESTING 4
3 C = 0.055N - 2.007 2
1 ACCEPT 0
0   10   20      30     40     50      60    70   80     90    100 N
Figure 15.5.31-1 Sample Plan 2 for Snubber Functional Test CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  15.0-8                              Revision 65

CPSES/TRM COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 & 2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM)
EFFECTIVE LISTING FOR SECTIONS Revision Record:
Original                              Submitted July 21, 1989 Revision 1                            September 15, 1989 Revision 2                            January 15, 1990 Revision 3                            July 20, 1990 Revision 4                            April 24, 1991 Revision 5                            September 6, 1991 Revision 6                            November 22, 1991 Revision 7                            March 18, 1992 Revision 8                            June 30, 1992 Revision 9                            December 18, 1992 Revision 10                           January 22, 1993 Revision 11                           February 3, 1993 Revision 12                           July 15, 1993 Revision 13                           September 14, 1993 Revision 14                           November 30, 1993 Revision 15                           April 15, 1994 Revision 16                           May 11, 1994 Revision 17                           February 24, 1995 Revision 18                           April 14, 1995 Revision 19                           May 15, 1995 Revision 20                           June 30, 1995 Revision 21                           January 24, 1996 Revision 22                           February 24, 1997 Revision 23                           March 13, 1997 Revision 24                           June 26, 1997 Revision 25                           July 31, 1997 Revision 26                           February 24, 1998 Revision 27                           April 14, 1999 Revision 28                           April 16, 1999 Revision 29                           July 27, 1999 Revision 30                           July 27, 1999 Revision 31                           August 5, 1999 Revision 32                           September 24, 1999 Revision 33                           October 7, 1999 Revision 34                           June 29, 2000 Revision 35                           September 30, 2000 Revision 36                           May 30, 2001 Revision 37                           August 14, 2001 Revision 38                           October 16, 2001 Revision 39                           March 27, 2002 Revision 40                           August 15, 2002 Revision 41                           September 24, 2002 Revision 42                           October 11, 2002 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM            EL-1                     Revision 72

CPSES/TRM COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 & 2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM)
EFFECTIVE LISTING FOR SECTIONS Revision Record:
Revision 43                           January 23, 2003 Revision 44                           February 4, 2003 Revision 45                           October 7, 2003 Revision 46                           February 17, 2004 Revision 47                           March 23, 2004 Revision 48                           April 23, 2004 Revision 49                           September 28, 2004 Revision 50                           July 22, 2005 Revision 51                           August 4, 2005 Revision 52                           September 27, 2005 Revision 53                           October 27, 2005 Revision 54                           December 29, 2005 Revision 55                           February 28, 2006 Revision 56                           June 1, 2006 Revision 57                           July 27, 2006 Revision 58                           September 20, 2006 Revision 59                           October 20, 2006 Revision 60                           January 18, 2007 Revision 61                           January 31, 2007 Revision 62                           February 26, 2007 Revision 63                           April 11, 2007 Revision 64                           June 21, 2007 Revision 65                           December 19, 2007 Revision 66                           February 28, 2008 Revision 67                           March 13, 2008 Revision 68                           April 4, 2008 Revision 69                           September 11, 2008 Revision 70                           November 13, 2008 Revision 71                           May 20, 2009 Revision 72                           September 29, 2009 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM            EL-2                     Revision 72

CPSES/TRM COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 & 2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM)
EFFECTIVE LISTING FOR SECTIONS Section 11.0                          Revision 56 Section 13.0                          Revision 56 Section 13.1                          Revision 56 Section 13.2                          Revision 68 Section 13.3                          Revision 72 Section 13.4                          Revision 56 Section 13.5                          Revision 56 Section 13.6                          Revision 70 Section 13.7                          Revision 60 Section 13.8                          Revision 66 Section 13.9                          Revision 66 Section 13.10                         Revision 65 Section 15.5                          Revision 65 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM            EL-3                    Revision 72

CPSES/TRM COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 & 2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM)
EFFECTIVE LISTING FOR SECTIONS Section B 13.0                        Revision 56 Section B 13.1                        Revision 65 Section B 13.2                        Revision 68 Section B 13.3                        Revision 70 Section B 13.4                        Revision 56 Section B 13.5                        Revision 56 Section B 13.6                        Revision 70 Section B 13.7                        Revision 63 Section B 13.8                        Revision 58 Section B 13.9                        Revision 66 Section B 13.10                       Revision 56 EL-1                                  Revision 72 EL-2                                  Revision 72 EL-3                                  Revision 72 EL-4                                  Revision 72 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM            EL-4                      Revision 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 56 LDCR-TR-2006-7 (EVAL-2005-005086-12) (TJE):
Administrative change for software conversion only.
The type of changes include changes such as (1) correction of spelling errors, (2) correction of inadvertent word processing errors from previous changes, and (3) style guide changes (e.g., changing from a numbered bullet list to an alphabetized bullet list and vice versa, change numbering of footnote naming scheme).
The entire TRM and TRM Bases will be reissued as Revision 56. For the text and tables there will be no change bars in the page margins for the editorial changes.
The list of effective pages is being replaced with a list of effective sections, tables, and figures.
Sections Revised:           All Tables Revised:             All Figures Revised:            All REVISION 57 LDCR-TR-2006-9 (EVAL-2004-000501-1) (TJE):
Correct tag number in Table 13.8.32-1b section 3.1 MCC 2EB1-2 compartment number 12B from "Personnel Air Lock Hydraulic Unit #2" to "Personnel Air Lock Hydraulic Unit #2 (CP2-BSAPPA-02M)"
1.) In Table 13.8.32-1b, the last sectence in section 4.3 description, replace the existing words, "These breakers are Square D type FC, KH, and LH." with the words, "These breakers are Square D type FH, KH, FA, and LH."
2.) Correct typos in tag numbers in Table 13.8.32-1b section 4.3.a, a.) Devise Location Ckt 2, change Breaker Type from FC to FH b.) Device Location Ckt 1 / Bkr-1, under System Powered, by removing the "-"
between CP and 2 in two places.
3.) Corrects tag number in Table 13.8.32-1b section 4.3.b a.) Devise Location Ckt 4, "Personnel Airlock Hydraulic Units CP-2-MEMEHU-01 and 02" to "Personnel Airlock Hydraulic Unit #2 (CP2-BSAPPA-02M)"
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-1                                     REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 57 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2006-9 (EVAL-2004-000501-1) (TJE) (continued):
b.) Devise Location Ckt 6, change Breaker Type from F4 to FH Correct typo to remove a dash in Table 13.7.39-1, Shield tag number from, "Removable Slab (Hatch Cover) SW Pump, CP-1-SWAPSW-02" to "Removable Slab (Hatch Cover)
SW Pump, CP1-SWAPSW-02" REVISION 58 LDCR-TR-2006-3 (EVAL-2005-004275-02) (TJE):
1.) Currently, TRS 13.8.31.2 reads, "Subject the diesel to an inspection in accordance with procedures prepared in conjunction with its manufacture''s recommendations for this class of standby service." The LDCR proposes to revise the TRS 13.8.31.2 to read, "Subject the diesel to inspections in accordance with procedures prepared in conjunction with the diesel owners groups preventive maintenance program."
NOTE:
The revision of this SR is proposed due to changes in the PM program recommended by the Cooper Owners Group which the CPSES EDGs are included in. The PM program is not being deleted nor are the vendors recommendations being ignored. The current PM program is being enhanced to include vendor input, predictive maintenance input, performance based input and the Cooper Owners Group input. The program changes will provide the site with the opportunity to move from a prescriptive time based program to a risk informed performance based program.
At the end of this section, add the words, "The diesels preventative maintenance program is commensurate for nuclear standby service, which takes into consideration the following factors: manufacturers recommendations, diesel owners groups recommendations, engine run time, equipment performance, calendar time, and plant preventative maintenance programs."
NOTE:
The revision of this SR is proposed due to changes in the PM program recommended by the Cooper Owners Group which the CPSES EDGs are included in. The PM program is not being deleted nor are the vendors recommendations being ignored. The current PM program is being enhanced to include vendor input, predictive maintenance input, performance based input and the Cooper Owners Group input. The program changes will provide the site with the opportunity to move from a prescriptive time based program to a risk informed performance based program.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-2                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 LDCR-TR-2004-5 (EVAL-2004-001881-04) (TJE):
Circuit Breaker 1ED1-1/14/BKR will be deleted from Table 13.8.32-1a under number 6.b.
Backup Breakers.
LDCR-TR-2005-10 (EVAL-2004-000773-05) (RAS):
Revise TR LCO 13.3.33 from "At least one Turbine Overspeed Protection System shall be OPERABLE" to "At least one Turbine Overspeed Protection Sub-system shall be OPERABLE" Revise Condition C from " Turbine overspeed protection inoperable for reasons other than Condition A or B" to Both Overspeed Protection Sub-systems inoperable" Revise TRS 13.3.33.1 to replace the Unit specific surveillance statements with the following statement applicable equally to both Units:
      "Test the Turbine Trip Block using the Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT)."
Delete TRS 13.3.33.3 and its associated frequency.
Revise TRS 13.3.33.6 as follows to make it applicable to both Units:
      "Test the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system 2 of 3 relay logic and output relays" Delete the existing TRM Bases description and replace in its entirety with the following:
BACKGROUND This specification is provided to ensure that the turbine overspeed protection instrumentation and the turbine Stop and Control Valves are operable and will protect the turbine from excessive overspeed. Protection from excessive overspeed is necessary to prevent the generation of potentially damaging missiles which could impact and damage safety-related components, equipment and structures. Turbine overspeed is limited by rapid closure of the turbine Stop or Control Valves whenever turbine power exceeds generator output, as would exist immediately following a load rejection.
The Electrohydraulic Control (EHC) System is the primary means of limiting the extent of an overspeed event, with the turbine Overspeed Protection System as a backup. The EHC System is designed to limit transient overspeed to less than 110% of rated speed after a full load rejection by closing both the High Pressure (HP) and Low Pressure (LP)
Control Valves. This function of the EHC System is performed by the normal speed/load control logic in conjunction with additional protection logic that ensures closure of all control valves under certain load rejection scenarios (Reference 1).
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    DOC-3                                 REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
To minimize the possibility of a component failure resulting in a loss of the control function, the EHC System utilizes triple redundant speed and load inputs, dual redundant digital controller processors, and dual redundant outputs (amplifiers, proportional valves, and follow-up piston banks) to the Control Valves.
In the unlikely event that the EHC System fails to limit the overspeed condition, the Overspeed Protection System will act to limit the overspeed to less than 120% of rated speed.
The Overspeed Protection System is made up of the following basic component groups:
Independent and redundant speed sensors and associated signal processing instrumentation, including bistables, provide individual speed channel trip signals to the Turbine AG-95F Digital Protection System and the hardware overspeed trip system (both described below) whenever turbine speed exceeds 1980 rpm.
The Turbine AG-95F Digital Protection System consists of three independent and redundant trains of equipment, including input modules, dual redundant automation processors and associated software, output modules, and output relays. The AG-95F System is a fail-safe system in that all inputs and outputs are normally energized in the non-tripped state.
Each train of the AG-95F System processes the individual speed channel trip signals using 2 of 3 trip logic. When the trip logic is satisfied, the associated output relays de-energize, each one subsequently de-energizing its associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve.
The Relay Protection System consists of relay logic and output relays that are diverse from, and completely bypass, the AG-95F Digital Protection System described above.
The logic and output relays are normally energized in the non-tripped state.
The relay logic processes the individual speed channel trip signals using 2 of 3 trip logic.
When the trip logic is satisfied, all three output relays de-energize, each one subsequently de-energizing its associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve.
The Turbine Trip Block utilizes three independent and redundant solenoid valves to actuate associated hydraulic pistons that are configured in a manner that provides a hydraulic 2 of 3 trip logic. When any two of the three solenoid valves de-energize, actuation of the associated pistons rapidly de-pressurizes the turbine Trip Fluid System, causing all turbine Stop and Control Valves to close. De-energization of a single solenoid valve will not trip the turbine.
The Overspeed Protection System consists of two redundant and diverse sub-systems, the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and the Software Overspeed Sub-system, that are configured using the component groups described above. Either of these sub-systems can independently trip the turbine.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    DOC-4                                 REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
The Hardware Overspeed Sub-system utilizes a set of three dedicated speed channels, each of which provides a trip signal to the Relay Protection System. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the relay logic de-energizes all three output relays which subsequently de-energize all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip.
As a backup, the three dedicated Hardware Overspeed Sub-system speed channels also provide trip signals to all three of the AG-95F System protection trains. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the output relay of each protection train is de-energized, subsequently de-energizing all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip.
The Software Overspeed Sub-system utilizes a second set of three dedicated speed channels which provide input to all three of AG-95F System protection trains. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the output relay of each protection train is de-energized, subsequently de-energizing all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip. The Software Overspeed System speed channels also provide speed signals to the EHC System as described above.
The design of the Overspeed Protection System includes several testing features that are used to ensure OPERABILITY of the system. These features include three Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT) tests that are manually initiated by the operator. They also include a test that is automatically executed by the system to ensure OPERABILITY of the speed channel instrumentation.
The ATT HP and LP Valve Tests cycle all Stop and Control Valves to ensure reliability and continuity of service. The HP and LP Stop Valve closure times are also verified to be within required response times (500 and 1500 msec, respectively). These tests cycle one pair of Stop and Control Valves at a time, so they may be performed with the plant on-line below approximately 85% power.
The ATT Turbine Trip Block Test de-energizes each Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve and verifies that the associated hydraulic piston moves to the trip position. The solenoid valve/piston pairs are sequentially tested one at a time, until all three are tested. Each pair is reset prior to testing the subsequent pair. Since only one solenoid valve/piston pair is tested at a time, the Trip Fluid System is never de-pressurized, and the turbine does not trip.
Each of the six individual speed channels (three for the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and three for the Software Overspeed Sub-system), is automatically tested once every 24 hours when turbine speed is >40 rpm. These tests verify that the speed channels trip when speed is simulated above 1980 rpm. The tests are initiated by the AG-95F System in a manner that precludes two speed channels from being tested at the same time. If desired, the speed channel tests may also be initiated by the operator.
Alarms are provided to alert the operator in the event a fault/failure is detected during the execution of any of the aforementioned tests.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    DOC-5                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSIS The Overspeed Protection System is required to be OPERABLE to provide sufficient protection against generation of potentially damaging missiles which could impact and damage safety-related components, equipment and structures. The turbine missile analysis is presented in Reference 2. Using References 3 through 5 as a basis, this analysis concludes that the risk for loss of an essential system due to a turbine missile event is acceptably low.
The robust design of the Overspeed Protection System, with its multiple speed channels, diverse hardware and software logic, and multiple Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/
hydraulic pistons, meets the intent of SRP 10.2 Part III for redundancy and independence.
LCO The Turbine Overspeed Protection Sub-systems are the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and the Software Overspeed Sub-system, one of which shall be OPERABLE.
The robust design of these sub-systems allows for the failure of individual components without rendering the sub-system(s) inoperable. Specifically, the minimum operability requirements for the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system include:
two OPERABLE dedicated hardware speed channels, and OPERABLE hardware relay logic with two OPERABLE output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/hydraulic pistons OR two OPERABLE dedicated hardware speed channels and two OPERABLE AG-95F System trains, including output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/
hydraulic pistons The minimum operability requirements for the Software Overspeed Sub-system include:
two OPERABLE dedicated software speed channels and two OPERABLE AG-95F System trains, including output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/
hydraulic pistons Individual component failures that do not render the sub-system(s) inoperable are addressed under the Corrective Action Program (CAP) with restoration times commensurate with the severity of the failure and the operational impact associated with the rework or repair.
Furthermore, component failures that result in rendering only one Overspeed Protection Sub-system inoperable are also addressed under the CAP with restoration times commensurate with the severity of the failure and the operational impact associated with the rework or repair.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-6                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
APPLICABILITY The OPERABILITY of one Overspeed Protection Sub-system ensures that the Overspeed Protection System is available to prevent an overspeed event while the unit is operating in MODE 1, 2, and 3 with steam available to roll the turbine. The APPLICABILITY is modified by a Note specifying that Overspeed Protection Sub-system OPERABILITY is not required in MODE 2 and 3 if the turbine is isolated from the steam supply by closing all Main Steam Isolation Valves and associated bypass valves.
ACTIONS A.1, A.2, and A.3 This ACTION is modified by a Note that specifies that separate Condition entries are allowed for each steam line if valves are inoperable in multiple steam lines.
If an HP Stop or Control Valve is inoperable such that it is not capable of properly isolating the steam line to the turbine in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status. Failure to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours requires that compensatory action be taken within the following 6 hours to ensure that the affected steam line is isolated by other means.
The 72 hour Completion Time for restoring the valve(s) takes into account the OPERABILITY of the remaining valve in the affected steam line and reasonable time for rework or repair. The 6 hour compensatory action Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
B.1, B.2, and B.3 This ACTION is modified by a Note that specifies that separate Condition entries are allowed for each steam line if valves are inoperable in multiple steam lines.
If an LP Stop or Control Valve is inoperable such that it is not capable of properly isolating the steam line to the turbine in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status. Failure to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours requires that compensatory action be taken within the following 6 hours to ensure that the affected steam line is isolated by other means.
The 72 hour Completion Time for restoring the valve(s) takes into account the OPERABILITY of the remaining valve in the affected steam line and reasonable time for rework or repair. The 6 hour compensatory action Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   DOC-7                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
C.1 If both Overspeed Protection Sub-systems are inoperable, such that neither is capable of initiating a turbine trip in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken within 6 hours to isolate the turbine from the steam supply.
The 6 hour Completion Time for isolating the turbine from the steam supply is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
D.1, D.2, and D.3 In the event that the aforementioned ACTIONS and associated Completion Times cannot be satisfied, action must be initiated within 1 hour to place the unit in a lower MODE, with subsequent action to place the unit in MODE 3 within the following 6 hours and to place the unit in MODE 4 within 6 hours after entering MODE 3. The need to perform these actions would most likely result from the inability to isolate the turbine from the steam supply. Placing the unit in MODE 4 will reduce steam pressure to the point where there is insufficient motive force to overspeed the turbine, even if it is not isolated from the steam generators.
The Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 and MODE 4 from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE The TRS 13.3.33 requirements are modified by a Note that specifies that the provisions of TRS 13.0.4 are not applicable.
TRS 13.3.33.1 This TRS specifies testing of the Turbine Trip Block using the Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT). This test de-energizes each Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve and verifies that the associated hydraulic piston moves to the trip position. The solenoid valve/piston pairs are sequentially tested one at a time, until all three are tested. Each pair is reset prior to testing the subsequent pair. Since only one solenoid valve/piston pair is tested at a time, the Trip Fluid System is never de-pressurized, and the turbine does not trip.
The 14 day test Frequency is based on the assumptions in the analyses presented in References 2 and 4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    DOC-8                                   REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
TRS 13.3.33.2 This TRS specifies testing of the turbine HP and LP Stop and Control Valves using the ATT. These tests cycle all Stop and Control Valves to ensure reliability and continuity of service. The HP and LP Stop Valve closure times are also verified to be within required response times (500 and 1500 msec, respectively). These tests cycle one pair of Stop and Control Valves at a time, so they may be performed with the plant on-line below approximately 85% power.
The 12 week test Frequency is based on the assumptions in the analyses presented in References 2 and 4.
TRS 13.3.33.3 This TRS has been deleted.
TRS 13.3.33.4 This TRS requires disassembly and inspection of at least one HP Stop Valve and one HP Control Valve on a 40 month Frequency to satisfy the turbine inservice inspection requirements described in Reference 6.
TRS 13.3.33.5 This TRS requires inspection of at least one LP Stop Valve and one LP Control Valve on a 40 month Frequency to satisfy the turbine inservice inspection requirements described in Reference 6.
TRS 13.3.33.6 This TRS requires a test of the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system 2 of 3 relay logic and output relays to ensure that this equipment is capable of processing an overspeed turbine trip signal on demand.
This equipment cannot be tested with the unit at power because performance of the test will trip the turbine. The 18 month test Frequency is consistent with Technical Specification test Frequencies assigned to similar equipment, and it affords the opportunity to test the equipment while the unit is shutdown. This test Frequency is judged to be acceptable based on the reliability of the equipment.
REFERENCES
: 1. CPSES FSAR, Section 10.2.2.7
: 2. CPSES FSAR, Section 3.5.1.3 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-9                                REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 59 (continued)
: 3. Engineering Report No. ER-504, Probability of Turbine Missiles from 1800 R/MIN Nuclear Steam Turbine-Generators with 46-Inch Last Stage Turbine Blades, Allis-Chalmers (Siemens) Power Systems, Inc, October 1975 [VL-04-001540]
: 4. Supplement to ER-504, Comparison MTBF Evaluation Comanche Peak ST Protection and Trip System and Engineering Report No. ER-504 Probability of Turbine Missiles, Siemens Power Corporation, February 11, 2004 [VL-05-000489]
: 5. CT-27331, Revision 4, Missile Probability Analysis Methodology for TXU Generation Company LP, Comanche Peak Units 1 and 2 with Siemens Retrofit Turbines, Siemens Westinghouse Power Corporation, October 29, 2004 [VL-05-001268]
: 6. CPSES FSAR, Section 10.2.3.6
: 7. 59EV-2004-000774-01 and 59EV-2004-000774-02, 10CFR50.59 Evaluations for installation of the Turbine Generator Digital Protection System in Comanche Peak Unit 1 and Unit 2, respectively REVISION 60 LDCR-TR-2007-1 (EVAL-2004-001966-05) (TJE):
Change TRS 13.3.31.2 frequency to 24 months from 18 months.
LDCR-TR-2006-10 (EVAL-2006-002274-01) (CBC):
LDCR-TR-2006-010, EVAL-2006-002274-01: The Required Action and Completion Time for A.1.1 and A.1.2 of TRM 13.7.35, "Snubbers" are replaced with "Enter the operability determination process for attached system(s)." [Required Action] and "Immediately"
[Completion Time]. Condition B and it's associated Required Action and Completion Time are deleted. TRM 13.7.35, "Snubbers" Condition A, Required Action A allows 72 hours for an inoperable snubber (to either be repaired or replaced) before the associated system/train is declared inoperable. Although this 72 hour provision was relocated from Technical Specifications during conversion to the Improved STS, the NRC has indicated that it is improper to allow an exception to the TS definition of Operability for this support system by way of the TRM. As a result, the industry and the NRC have developed a revision to the STS in TSTF-372. This TSTF is NRC approved and ready for adoption.
The TSTF allows 72 hours (or 12 hours for a snubber affecting both trains) for seismic snubbers before declaring the system inoperable using a risk informed approach by the addition new TS 3.0.8. Since there are no current plans to adopt TSTF-372 at Comanche Peak, TRM 13.7.35 is revised to remove the 72 hour delay. Deletion of the 72 hour delay is consistent with the NRC's expectations as stated in 70FR23252.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-10                                   REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 60 (continued)
TR LCO 13.7.35 is revised to exclude certain snubbers. Those snubber(s) that have an anlysis which determines that the supported TS sytem(s) do not require the snubber(s) to be functional in order to support the operability of the system(s) are excluded from TR LCO 13.7.35. This is consistent with Section 4.1 of TSTF-IG-05-03, IMPLEMENTATION GUIDANCE FOR TSTF-372, REVISION 4, "ADDITION OF LCO 3.0.8, INOPERABILITY OF SNUBBERS," dated Ocober 2005 and RIS-2005-020, REVISION TO GUIDANCE FORMERLY CONTAINED IN NRC GENERIC LETTER 91-18, INFORMATION TO LICENSEES REGARDING TWO NRC INSPECTION MANUAL SECTIONS ON RESOLUTION OF DEGRADED AND NONCONFORMING CONDITIONS AND ON OPERABILITY," dated September 26, 2005.
REVISION 61 LDCR-TR-2006-1 (EVAL-2004-001966-03) (TJE):
Justification: The use of the new Seismic Monitoring System with only free-field ground motion input will not compromise the ability of the system to determine whether or not the OBE was exceeded and subsequent shutdown of both units per Appendix A of 10CFR100. Therefore, the new Seismic Monitoring System does not present any added risk to public health or nuclear safety.
The deletion of the steps for restoring the seismic monitoring system to an operable status and for the interpretation of the seismic data reflects a change in technology provided with the new system. The previous seismic monitoring system was rendered inoperable during the process of recording a seismic event. With the exception of the three triaxial accelerometers, the previous system used smoked scribe plates in the sensors that can not distinguish between different seismic events. In order to interpret the data from a seismic event and restore operability, the scribe plates had to be retrieved from the field, replaced with freshly smoked scribe plates, and then individually interpreted. The new seismic monitoring system is not rendered inoperable by a seismic event. The new system has the ability to digitally record up to 90-minutes of seismic ground motion over any number of discrete seismic events. The new seismic monitoring system will automatically; analyze the earthquake data, provide a real-time display of the data analysis and its results on the system monitor, print a hard copy of the analysis results, and if the OBE is exceeded the system will also provide Control Room annunciation. Based on the changes introduced by the new seismic monitoring as discussed above, the deletion of the steps for post-seismic event activities is acceptable.
1.) TR LCO 13.3.31 delete the words, "shown in Table 13.3.31-1" 2.) Replace Condition A, including the Note with the words, "Seismic monitoring instrument inoperable."
3.) Replace Required Action A.1 with the words, "Restore seismic monitoring instrument to OPERABLE status."
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-11                                 REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 61 (continued) 4.) Replace the Completion Time of "24 hours with "30 days."
5.) Delete Required Actions A.2 and A.3 and the associated Completion Times.
Delete Conditions B and C and the associated Required Actions and Completion Times.
1.) Delete the Note that says:
      "Refer to Table 13.3.31-1 to determine which TRS apply for each seismic monitoring instrument."
2.) Change TRS 13.3.31.2 Frequency from 24 months to 18 months.
Delete Table 13.3.31-1 and associated foot notes Delete the entire Bases section and replace it with the following words:
      "The OPERABILITY of the seismic monitoring system ensures that sufficient capability is available to promptly determine whether the OBE has been exceeded and to collect information to evaluate the response of features important to safety. This capability is required pursuant to Appendix A of 10CFR100. The instrumentation provided meets the intent of Regulatory Guide 1.12, "Instrumentation for Earthquakes," April 1974, as described in the FSAR. The seismic monitoring system will record and analyze a seismic event to determine OBE exceedance in accordance with the requirements described in the FSAR."
REVISION 62 LDCR-TR-2006-5 (EVAL-2004-001881-04) (TJE):
Circuit Breaker 1ED1-1/14/BKR will be deleted from Table 13.8.32-1a under number 6.b.
Backup Breakers.
REVISION 63 LDCR-TR-2007-2 (EVAL-2004-002710-05) (TJE):
The FDA installs the Head Assembly Upgrade Package (HAUP) on the replacement reactor vessel closure head during 1RF12. The objective of the HAUP modification is to simplify the process of removal and installation of the reactor vessel closure head assembly for refueling operations (i.e., shorten the duration). Therefore, this LDCR will show unit differences.
Add "(Unit 2 Only)" after "General Area CRDM Shroud Exhaust" in the Temperature Limit table under "Area Monitored." Additionally, add a second entry of "140" under "Normal Conditions" and "149" under "Abnormal Conditions" and "CRDM Air Handling Unit Inlet (Unit 1 Only)" under "Area Monitored."
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 DOC-12                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 63 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2005-3 (EVAL-2005-000224-01) (TJE):
Revised note 12 to include motor driven AFW pumps in Units 1 and 2 and feedwater split flow bypass valves in Unit 2 only due to deletion of split flow valves in Unit 1 as a result of the design modification to replace the SGs in Unit 1.
Revised note 13 to include turbine driven AFW pumps in Units 1 and 2 and feedwater split flow bypass valves in Unit 2 only due to deletion of split flow valves in Unit 1 as a result of the design modification to replace the SGs in Unit 1.
Under Feedwater Isolation Signal on Table 13.6.3-1 add "2-" in front of valve numbers FV-2193, FV-2194, FV-2195, and FV-2196.
REVISION 64 LDCR-TR-2007-8 (EVAL-2007-001391-01) (TJE):
The last sentence of TRM 15.5.31.i, "Snubber Service Life Program," reads, " Part replacement shall be documented and the documentation shall be retained in accordance with Technical Specification 6.10.2." Replace the reference to "Technical Specificaions 6.10.2" with "FSAR 17.2.17.2.12."
LA 50/36 relocated the record retention requirements of snubbers from TS to the FSAR.
This LDCR corrects the reference to the implementing document.
LDCR-TR-2004-9 (EVAL-2003-001212-04) (TJE):
Remove the Note and the Tables in the Background section of TRB 13.1.31 which required specific BAT levels and BAT temperatures to be maintained during startup and shutdown modes when the gravity feed path from the BAT to the CCP's was used when sparging the BAT with nitrogen.
      "Note: The level values for the Boric Acid Storage Tank (BAST) are non-conservative when using the gravity feed path from the BAST to the CCPs. The BAST levels are correct when using the path from the BAST to the Boric Acid Transfer Pump. The only place that it is incorrect is when using the BASTs to feed the CCPs through the gravity feed path when the BASTs have been sparged with nitrogen. This issue is being addressed in the corrective action program (SMF-2003-001212). In the interim, conservative limits for the BAST tanks levels have been identified in operations procedures. The conservative limits are:
Gravity Feed to CCP Unit     Mode      BAT Temperature         Required BAT Level 1        1-4       "<or=" 110 degree F     63 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 95 degree F      56 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 80 degree F      53 percent CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-13                                   REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 64 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2004-9 (EVAL-2003-001212-04) (TJE) (continued):
2       1-4        "<or=" 110 degree F     95 percent 2       1-4        "<or=" 95 degree F      89 percent 2       1-4        "<or=" 80 degree F      86 percent" Remove the Note and the Tables in TRS 13.1.31.3 which required specific BAT levels and BAT temperatures to be maintained during startup and shutdown modes when the gravity feed path from the BAT to the CCP's was used when sparging the BAT with nitrogen.
      "Note: The level values for the Boric Acid Storage Tank (BAST) are non-conservative when using the gravity feed path from the BAST to the CCPs. The BAST levels are correct when using the path from the BAST to the Boric Acid Transfer Pump. The only place that it is incorrect is when using the BASTs to feed the CCPs through the gravity feed path when the BASTs have been sparged with nitrogen. This issue is being addressed in the corrective action program (SMF-2003-001212). In the interim, conservative limits for the BAST tanks levels have been identified in operations procedures. The conservative limits are:
Gravity Feed to CCP Unit    Mode       BAT Temperature         Required BAT Level 1       1-4        "<or=" 110 degree F     63 percent 1       1-4        "<or=" 95 degree F      56 percent 1       1-4        "<or=" 80 degree F      53 percent 2       1-4        "<or=" 110 degree F     95 percent 2       1-4        "<or=" 95 degree F      89 percent 2       1-4        "<or=" 80 degree F      86 percent" Remove the Note and the Tables in the Background section of TRB 13.1.32 which required specific BAT levels and BAT temperatures to be maintained during startup and shutdown modes when the gravity feed path from the BAT to the CCP's was used when sparging the BAT with nitrogen.
      "Note: The level values for the Boric Acid Storage Tank (BAST) are non-conservative when using the gravity feed path from the BAST to the CCPs. The BAST levels are correct when using the path from the BAST to the Boric Acid Transfer Pump. The only place that it is incorrect is when using the BASTs to feed the CCPs through the gravity feed path when the BASTs have been sparged with nitrogen. This issue is being addressed in the corrective action program (SMF-2003-001212). In the interim, conservative limits for the BAST tanks levels have been identified in operations procedures. The conservative limits are:
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-14                               REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 64 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2004-9 (EVAL-2003-001212-04) (TJE) (continued):
conservative limits for the BAST tanks levels have been identified in operations procedures. The conservative limits are:
Gravity Feed to CCP Unit     Mode      BAT Temperature         Required BAT Level 1        1-4       "<or=" 110 degree F     63 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 95 degree F      56 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 80 degree F      53 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 110 degree F     95 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 95 degree F      89 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 80 degree F      86 percent" Remove the Note and the Tables in TRS 13.1.32.4 and TRS 13.1.32.5 which required specific BAT levels and BAT temperatures to be maintained during startup and shutdown modes when the gravity feed path from the BAT to the CCP's was used when sparging the BAT with nitrogen.
      "Note: The level values for the Boric Acid Storage Tank (BAST) are non-conservative when using the gravity feed path from the BAST to the CCPs. The BAST levels are correct when using the path from the BAST to the Boric Acid Transfer Pump. The only place that it is incorrect is when using the BASTs to feed the CCPs through the gravity feed path when the BASTs have been sparged with nitrogen. This issue is being addressed in the corrective action program (SMF-2003-001212). In the interim, conservative limits for the BAST tanks levels have been identified in operations procedures. The conservative limits are:
Gravity Feed to CCP Unit     Mode      BAT Temperature         Required BAT Level 1        1-4       "<or=" 110 degree F     63 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 95 degree F      56 percent 1        1-4       "<or=" 80 degree F      53 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 110 degree F     95 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 95 degree F      89 percent 2        1-4       "<or=" 80 degree F      86 percent" LDCR-TR-2005-6 (EVAL-2005-002551-01) (TJE):
1.) In the second paragraph on page 13.3-8, replace the last sentence which reads, "SR 3.3.1.2 Note 1 requires that the NIS and N-16 Power Monitor channels be adjusted if the absolute difference is > 2% RPT."
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-15                               REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 64 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2005-6 (EVAL-2005-002551-01) (TJE) (continued):
with the words, "SR 3.3.1.2 requires that the NIS Power Range channels be adjusted if the calorimetric heat balance calculation results exceed the NIS Power Range indication by more than +2% RTP, and the N-16 Power Monitor channels be adjusted if the calorimetric heat balance calculation results exceed the N-16 Power Monitor indication by more than +2% RTP."
2.) In the second sentence of the third paragraph on page 13.3-8, replace the "+-" with a
      "+". The sentence will be revised to read, "At that time, the NIS and N-16 power indications must be normalized to indicate within at least + 2% RTP of the calorimetric measurement."
Please note that this change makes the TRM Bases consistent with NRC License Amendment 133.
REVISION 65 LDCR-TR-1999-12 (EVAL-2006-002367-01) (TJE):
Add a new paragraph to the end of the TRM Bases LCO 13.1.32 to allow the required Boric Acid Storage Tank (BAST) flowpath to be considered OPERABLE during BAST recirculation if capable of being manually realigned to the injection flowpath.
When recirculating the BAST, manual action to align the required flowpath to the injection mode consists of locally closing one valve, XCS-8477A for BAST X-01 or XCS-8477B for BAST X-02. The Technical Requirement specifically credits the gravity feed path as one acceptable flowpath. The gravity feed flowpath must be manually aligned by operating valves locally. Also, other Technical Specifications (for example TS 3.5.3) provide an allowance to take credit for manually realigning required flowpaths. Providing the flexibility to take credit for the capability of manual realignment of the required flowpath will allow operation of the BA System to maintain proper chemistry control of the required borated water source when the alternate source and/or flowpath is unavailable.
This change will make the TRM consistent with OPS procedure SOP-105.
Add the following words to the last paragraph of Bases LCO 13.1.31 on page B 13.1-3, "An OPERABLE Boration Injection System is required to be capable of being manually aligned when boration is required, and in all cases within 15 minutes, to establish boration flow. When local manual control is being credited, administrative controls are utilized to ensure 1) appropriate personnel are aware of the status of the Boration Injection System, and 2) specified individuals are designated and readily available to perform the valve alignment necessary to establish boration flow."
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    DOC-16                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 65 (continued)
LDCR-TR-1999-12 (EVAL-2006-002367-01) (TJE) (continued):
Add the following new paragraph to the end of the Bases LCO 13.1.32 on page B 13.1-10, "An OPERABLE Boration Injection System is required to be capable of being manually aligned when boration is required, and in all cases within 15 minutes, to establish boration flow. When local manual control is being credited, administrative controls are utilized to ensure 1) appropriate personnel are aware of the status of the Boration Injection System, and 2) specified individuals are designated and readily available to perform the valve alignment necessary to establish boration flow."
LDCR-TR-2006-2 (EVAL-2006-000569-01) (TJE):
In the Background section of the TRM Bases TRM, 13.1-1, replace the second paragraph which reads, "The components required to perform this function include: (1) borated water sources, (2) charging pumps, (3) separate flow paths, (4) boric acid transfer pumps, and (5) an emergency power supply from OPERABLE diesel generators."
with the words, "The components required to perform this function in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 include: (1) borated water sources, (2) pumps, (3) separate flow paths, and (4) the associated train Class 1E bus power supplies."
In the TRM Bases section 13.1.32, page 13.1-8, insert the following paragraph after the first paragraph in the Background section, "The components required to perform this function in MODES 5 and 6 include: (1) a borated water source, (2) pump(s), (3) a functional flow path and (4) the associated train Class 1E bus power supply."
LDCR-TR-2007-9 (EVAL-2006-002367-02) (TJE):
Technical Specifications was revised via LDCR TS-2006-001 (EVAL-2006-000627       01) reflect current organizational titles per letter CPSES-200502468-01-01.
TS 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2.d, 5.5.1.b, and 5.5.17 use to specify that the Plant Manager is responsible for the designated functions described by the respective Specification with a Note stating these "Duties may be performed by the Vice President of Nuclear Operations if that organizational position is assigned." This Note was deleted from the Technical Specifications. There are no changes to the prerequisite qualifications for the position, the assigned responsibilities, or the organizational reporting relationships for the Plant Manager or the Site Vice President, formerly the Vice President, Nuclear Operations.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   DOC-17                                 REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 65 (continued)
LDCR-TR-2007-9 (EVAL-2006-002367-02) (TJE) (continued):
LDCR TR-2007-009 proposes to delete this Note in accordance with LDCR TS-2006-001 (EVAL-2006-000627-01-01) and is an administrative change which will make the TRM more accurately reflect the current, and expected future, organizational structure at CPSES.
In 15.5.17.d, delete the "*" after the words "Plant Manager" and delete the note at the bottom of the page that says, "* Duties may be performed by the Vice President of Nuclear Operations if that organizational position is assigned."
LDCR-TR-2007-12 (EVAL-2006-000569-02) (TJE):
Correct TRM Table number from 13.10.31-11 tp 13.10.31-1 REVISION 66 LDCR-TR-2007-5 (EVAL-2004-002063-13) (TJE):
On TRM Table 13.8.32-1a, Page 7 of 13, section 3.3, delete "or THFK" from the description of the system powered and delete the following breaker information from the table:
      "7F    THFK      Electric H2 Recombiner Power Supply PNL 01" On TRM Table 13.8.32-1a, Page 8 of 13, section 3.4, delete "or THFK" from the description of the system powered and delete the following breaker information from the table:
      "6F    THFK      Elect. H2 Recombiner Power Supply PNL 02" On TRM Table 13.8.32-1b, Page 7 of 14, section 3.3, delete "or THFK" from the description of the system powered and delete the following breaker information from the table:
      "7F    THFK      Electric H2 Recombiner Power Supply PNL 01" On TRM Table 13.8.32-1b, Page 8 of 14, section 3.4, delete "or THFK" from the description of the system powered and delete the following breaker information from the table:
      "6F    THFK      Elect. H2 Recombiner Power Supply PNL 02" CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-18                                REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes LDCR-TR-2007-11 (EVAL-2006-000629-02) (TJE):
Technical Justification:
The primary basis for TR LCO 13.9.31 is to ensure sufficient fission product decay prior to fuel movement such that anticipated doses resulting from a postulated fuel handling accident (FHA) would not exceed regulatory limits. The proposed change is expected to increase the dose consequences of a FHA and, as a result, the accident analysis for this event was revised and is documented in WPT-16939. The revised analysis results demonstrate that calculated accident doses to personnel both offsite and in the control room at the above conditions increase slightly, however all are well within the limits specified in Regulatory Guide 1.195 and 10CFR100. The revised FHA results have been incorporated into DBD-ME-027 Rev. 9.
On page 13.9-1, change 100 hours to 75 hours in TR LCO 13.9.31, Condition A, and in TRS 13.9.31.1 Replace the words in TRB 13.9.31, "Decay Time," which read, "The minimum requirement for reactor subcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies in the reactor vessel ensures that sufficient time has elapsed to allow the radioactive decay of the short-lived fission products. This decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses."
with the words, "The minimum required time for reactor subcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies in the reactor vessel ensures sufficient radioactive decay of those fission products that contribute to the radiological consequences of a postulated fuel handling accident. Per Regulatory Guide 1.195, these fission products include xenon, krypton and iodine whose activity is assumed to be instantaneously released to the refueling cavity during the accident. The fraction of iodine retained within the cavity is determined by the water depth above the damaged fuel assembly as specified in Technical Specifications LCO 3.9.7, "Refueling Cavity Water Level." Retention of noble gases within the cavity is negligible. Release of fission products from the refueling cavity to the environment occurs over a 2-hour time period.
The required decay time and the water level requirement of Technical Specifications LCO 3.9.7 ensure the control room, exclusion area boundary, and low population zone dose limits of References 1, 3 and 4 are met following a fuel handling accident within containment. The assumptions for a fuel handling accident occurring within the fuel building are similar and the radiological consequences are equivalent. The required decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analysis (Ref. 5)."
REFERENCES           1. Regulatory Guide 1.195, May 2003
: 2. Technical Specifications
: 3. 10CFR100 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 DOC-19                                 REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes LDCR-TR-2007-11 (EVAL-2006-000629-02) (TJE) (continued):
: 4. Appendix A to 10CFR50, General Design Criteria 19
: 5. FSAR Section 15.7.4" REVISION 67 LDCR-TR-2007-3 (EVAL-2005-002580-02) (TJE):
Change the frequency of TRS 13.3.33.2 from every "12" weeks to every "26" weeks as approved by NRC in License Amendment 143 issued on 2/29/08.
1.) In TRS 13.3.33.1, change the words "References 2 and 4" to "Reference 2" 2.) In TRS 13.3.33.2, a.) insert "manual test or the" in first sentence before ATT, and b.)
change the frequency from "12" weeks to "26" weeks and change Reference "4" to "5".
In the Reference section B 13.3, 1.) delete the VL number from Reference 3 2.) replace Reference 4 with the word "Deleted" In the Reference section B 13.3, 1.) for Reference 5, change the revision from "4" to "5", change the date from "October 29, 2004" to "January 18, 2007," and delete the VL number.
2.) Correct a typo by changing "59EV-2004-000774-01" to "59EV-2004-000773-01" and "59EV-2004-000774-02" to "59EV-2004-000773-02."
3.) Add Reference 8, "LDCR TR-2007-003, Change TRS 13.3.33.2 Frequency from 12 weeks to 26 weeks, EVAL-2005-002580-02."
In B 13.3 of the Applicable Safety analyses second sentence of first paragraph, change "Using References 3 through 5" to "Using References 3 and 5" In the Actions sections of the second paragraph, change "If an HP" to "If a HP" In the Actions section under B.1, B.2, and B.3 second paragraph, first sentence, replace "If an LP" with "If a LP" CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                DOC-20                                    REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes REVISION 68 LDCR-TR-2007-6 (EVAL-2006-004119-03) (TJE):
The PDMS instrumentation does not change any of the key safety parameter limits or levels of margin as considered in the reference design basis evaluations.
Add new TR section 13.2.34 which will read, "TR 13.2.34        Power Distribution Monitoring System 13.2-6" The PDMS instrumentation does not change any of the key safety parameter limits or levels of margin as considered in the reference design basis evaluations.
In the Applicability section of TR 13.2.32, 1.) change 15% to 50% and 2.) add a note that says, "Mode 1 with THERMAL POWER "greater than or equal to" 15%
RTP during Unit 1, Cycle 13" The PDMS instrumentation does not change any of the key safety parameter limits or levels of margin as considered in the reference design basis evaluations.
1.) In TRS 13.2.32.1 Surveillance Notes, a.) In Note 1, delete the words, "and for the first 24 hours after restoring to OPERABLE status" b.) Add Note 3 that will read, "Only required to be performed for the first 24 hours after restoring the AFD Monitor Alarm to OPERABLE status during Unit 1, Cycle 13.
2.) In TRS 13.2.32.1 Frequency note, add "for Unit 1, cycle 13" after the words "Only required."
The PDMS instrumentation does not change any of the key safety parameter limits or levels of margin as considered in the reference design basis evaluations.
Add the new TR 13.2.34, "Power Distribution Monitoring System" REVISION 69 LDCR-TR-2008-1 (EVAL-2006-003080-16) (TJE):
In TR 13.3.34, 1.) Delete the "*" in the Applicability section 2.) Required Actions B.1 and B.3, delete "(3411 MWth), and CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   DOC-21                                  REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes LDCR-TR-2008-1 (EVAL-2006-003080-16) (TJE) (continued):
3.) Delete the note at the bottom of the page that says, "*This TRM requirement applies to Unit 2 only until implementation of the 1.4% uprate for Unit1 during 1RF09."
Revise 13.3.34 Plant Calorimetric Measurement to show Unit differences. For Unit 2 Cycle 11, the RATED THERMAL POWER is 3458 MWth, and the core power should be reduced to 3411 MWth if the LEFMv is unavailable. For Unit 1, the RATED THERMAL POWER is 3612 MWth, and the core power shoulc be reduced to 3562 if the LEFMv is unavailable.
In the Reference sections, add the following three references:
: 2. License Amendment Request (LAR) 07-004, Revision to the Operating License and Technical Specifications 1.0, "Use and Application" and 3.7.17, "Spent Fuel Assembly Storage" to Revise Rated Thermal Power from 3458 MWth to 3612 MWth. Docket Nos.
50-445 and 50-446, CPSES.
: 3. WCAP-16840-P, Rev. 0, Comanche Peak Nuclear Power Plant Stretch Power Uprate Licensing Report.
: 4. License Amendment 146, Revision to the Operating License and Technical Specifications 1.0, "Use and Application" to Revise Rated Thermal Power from 3458 MWth to 3612 MWth. Docket Nos. 50-445 and 50-446, CPSES.
REVISION 70 LDCR-TR-2007-10 (EVAL-2007-002743-03) (TJE):
Relocate the TS detailed technical requirements for verifying equilibrium Containment emergency sump pH commensurate with Technical Specification (TS) Surveillance Requirement SR 3.6.7.1 to the TRM 13.6.7. ACTIONS for not verifying equilibrium Containment emergency sump pH is contained in Technical Specification 3.6.7. The performance test requirements for the Spray Additive System are subject to TS SR 3.6.7.1.
This change affects the Containment Spray System which is intended to respond to and mitigate the effects of a LOCA. The Containment Spray System will continue to function in a manner consistent with the plant design basis. There will be no degradation in the performance of nor an increase in the number of challenges to equipment assumed to function during an accident situation.
LDCR-TR-2008-3 (EVAL-2008-003080-1) (TJE):
In the TRM Bases 13.3.33, Applicable Safety Analyses section, last sentence, replace "through" with "and".
In TRM Bases 13.3.33, Reference 3, change 46 to 44.
Deleted References 7 and 8 of TRM Bases 13.3.33.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  DOC-22                               REVISION 72

Technical Requirements Manual - Description of Changes LDCR-TR-2008-3 (EVAL-2008-003080-1) (TJE) (continued):
In TRM 13.9.34 header, add an "a" to "Storge" to correctly spell Storage.
REVISION 71 LDCR-TR-2009-002 (EVAL-2009-001094-02) (RAS):
Revises the limit for the OTN16 Reactor Trip function in Table 13.3.1-1 (item 6) to less than or equal to 3.3 seconds and footnote 2 to state "An additional 6 seconds maximum delay allowance for the RTD/thermal well response time provides an overall Overtemperature N-16 Response Time of less than or equal to 9.3 seconds for the Tcold input."
REVISION 72 LDCR-TR-2009-003 (EVAL-2008-002987-03) (RAS):
Replace the second NOTE for TRS 13.3.32.3 with the following "For the source range neutron detectors, performance data is obtained and evaluated."
The bias curve that is described is for establishing the bias voltage to filter gamma pulses and provides no meaningful assessment of detector condition.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 DOC-23                                     REVISION 72

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS MANUAL (TRM) BASES FOR COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION UNITS 1 AND 2

Table of Contents B 13.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT APPLICABILITY ..........................................B 13.0-1 B 13.1     REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .....................................................B 13.1-1 TRB 13.1.31 Boration Injection System - Operating..............................................B 13.1-1 TRB 13.1.32 Boration Injection System - Shutdown .............................................B 13.1-8 TRB 13.1.37 Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator .................B 13.1-13 TRB 13.1.38 Control Bank Insertion Limits ...........................................................B 13.1-14 TRB 13.1.39 Rod Position Indication - Shutdown .................................................B 13.1-15 B 13.2     POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS...........................................................B 13.2-1 TRB 13.2.31 Moveable Incore Detection System..................................................B 13.2-1 TRB 13.2.32 Axial Flux Difference (AFD) ..............................................................B 13.2-2 TRB 13.2.33 Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (QPTR) Alarm ........................................B 13.2-3 TRB 13.2.34 Power Distribution Monitoring System .............................................B 13.2-4 B 13.3     INSTRUMENTATION.............................................................................B 13.3-1 TRB 13.3.1 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Times ........B 13.3-1 TRB 13.3.2 Engineered Safety Features Actuation System (ESFAS)
Instrumentation Response Times...............................................B 13.3-2 TRB 13.3.5 Loss of Power (LOP) Diesel Generator (DG) Start Instrumentation Response Times...............................................B 13.3-3 TRB 13.3.31 Seismic Instrumentation ...................................................................B 13.3-4 TRB 13.3.32 Source Range Neutron Flux .............................................................B 13.3-5 TRB 13.3.33 Turbine Overspeed Protection .........................................................B 13.3-7 TRB 13.3.34 Plant Calorimetric Measurement ......................................................B 13.3-10 B 13.4     REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM............................................................B 13.4-1 TRB 13.4.14 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Pressure Isolation Valves ..............B 13.4-1 TRB 13.4.31 Loose Parts Detection System .........................................................B 13.4-2 TRB 13.4.33 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Chemistry ....................................B 13.4-3 TRB 13.4.34 Pressurizer .......................................................................................B 13.4-4 TRB 13.4.35 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Vents Specification ........................B 13.4-5 B 13.5     EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)............................B 13.5-1 TRB 13.5.31 ECCS - Containment Debris ............................................................B 13.5-1 TRB 13.5.31 ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates ........................................................B 13.5-2 B 13.6     CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS...................................................................B 13.6-1 TRB 13.6.3 Containment Isolation Valves ...........................................................B 13.6-1 TRB 13.6.6 Containment Spray System..............................................................B 13.6-2 TRB 13.6.7 Spray Additive System .....................................................................B 13.6-3 B 13.7     PLANT SYSTEMS..................................................................................B 13.7-1 TRB 13.7.31 Steam Generator Atmospheric Relief Valve (ARV) -
Air Accumulator Tank .................................................................B 13.7-1 TRB 13.7.32 Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation ......................B 13.7-2 TRB 13.7.33 Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and Safe Shutdown Impoundment (SSI) Dam............................................................B 13.7-3 (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                             Bi                                                        Revision 70

Table of Contents (continued)
TRB 13.7.34 Flood Protection ...............................................................................B 13.7-4 TRB 13.7.35 Snubbers ..........................................................................................B 13.7-5 TRB 13.7.36 Area Temperature Monitoring ..........................................................B 13.7-6 TRB 13.7.37 Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units..........................................................B 13.7-7 TRB 13.7.38 Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit........B 13.7-8 TRB 13.7.39 Tornado Missile Shields ...................................................................B 13.7-9 TRB 13.7.41 Condensate Storage Tank (CST) Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves...................................................................B 13.7-11 B 13.8     ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ........................................................B 13.8-1 TRB 13.8.31 AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements) ................................B 13.8-1 TRB 13.8.32 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices......................................................................B 13.8-2 B 13.9     REFUELING OPERATIONS ..................................................................B 13.9-1 TRB 13.9.31 Decay Time ......................................................................................B 13.9-1 TRB 13.9.32 Refueling Operations / Communications ..........................................B 13.9-2 TRB 13.9.33 Refueling Machine............................................................................B 13.9-3 TRB 13.9.34 Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas......................B 13.9-4 TRB 13.9.35 Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods .....................................B 13.9-5 TRB 13.9.36 Fuel Storage Area Water Level ........................................................B 13.9-6 B 13.10    EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM.............................................................................................B 13.10-1 TRB 13.10.31 Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation .......................................B 13.10-1 TRB 13.10.32 Gas Storage Tanks ..........................................................................B 13.10-2 TRB 13.10.33 Liquid Holdup Tanks.........................................................................B 13.10-3 TRB 13.10.34 Explosive Gas Mixture......................................................................B 13.10-4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                            B ii                                                       Revision 70

TR LCO and TRS Applicability TRB 13.0 B 13.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT (TR)
LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERABILITY (TR LCO)
AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT SURVEILLANCE (TRS) APPLICABILITY BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.0.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.0-1                             Revision 56

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 B 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TRB 13.1.31 Boration Injection System - Operating BASES BACKGROUND            The Boration Injection System is a subsystem of the Chemical and Volume Control System (CVCS). The CVCS regulates the concentration of chemical neutron absorber (boron) in the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) to control reactivity changes. The Boration Injection System ensures that negative reactivity control is available during each MODE of facility operation. The amount of boric acid stored in the borated water sources exceeds the amount required to bring the reactor to hot shutdown and to compensate for subsequent xenon decay. The shutdown reactivity requirements are specified in Technical Specifications LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM)," LCO 3.1.5, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," LCO 3.1.6, "Control Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration."
The components required to perform this function in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 include: (1) borated water sources, (2) pumps, (3) separate flow paths, and (4) the associated train Class 1E bus power supplies.
Boric acid is stored in two boric acid tanks (BATs). Each BAT has a total volume of 46,000 gallons. The combined boric acid tank capacity is sized to store sufficient boric acid solution for refueling plus enough for a cold shutdown from full power operation immediately following refueling with the most reactive control rod not inserted. The two boric acid tanks are shared between Units 1 and 2. Two boric acid transfer pumps are provided for each unit with one pump normally required to provide boric acid to the suction header of the charging pumps, and the second pump in reserve. They are both aligned to take suction from separate boric acid tanks. On a demand signal by the reactor makeup controller, the pump starts and delivers boric acid to the suction header of the charging pumps. The pump can also be used to recirculate the boric acid tank fluid.
The Refueling Water Storage Tank (RWST) is also credited with being a required borated water source. The charging pumps and RWST are available to support the core cooling function in the event of a loss of coolant accident. Two charging pumps may be manually aligned, as necessary, to inject borated water from the RWST to the RCS for negative reactivity control. OPERABILITY of the charging pumps, the RWST, and appropriate core cooling flow paths are required as part of the Emergency Core Cooling System (ECCS). The Technical Specifications in Section 3.5 address the ECCS core cooling requirements.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.1-1                                    Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES BACKGROUND         As listed below, the required indicated levels for the boric acid storage (continued)       tanks and the RWST include allowances for required/analytical volume, unusable volume, measurement uncertainties (which include instrument error and tank tolerances, as applicable), margin, and other required volume.
Tank   MODES       Ind. Unusable Required Measurement   Margin     Other Level   Volume   Volume    Uncertainty (gal)     (gal)                (gal)      (gal)
RWST    1, 2, 3, 4 95%     45,494    70,702   4% of span    N/A     357,535*
BAT    1, 2, 3, 4 50%      3,221    15,700   6% of span    N/A        N/A
* Additional volume required to meet Technical Specification 3.5.4.
APPLICABLE         The Boration Injection System is not assumed to be OPERABLE to SAFETY ANALYSES    mitigate the consequences of a design basis accident (DBA) or transient.
However, the Boration Injection System satisfies, in part, General Design Criteria 26. In the event of a malfunction of the CVCS, which may cause a boron dilution event, manual operator action is to ensure the primary water makeup control valves in the Reactor Makeup System are closed.
The Boration Injection System is required to be OPERABLE to provide sufficient boration flow paths to accomplish (1) chemical shim reactivity control, and (2) boration in the event SDM is discovered to be outside the Technical Specification limit. The primary method of boration is performed from the BAT(s). An acceptable alternative form of boration is boron injection from the RWST. With the RCS average temperature above 200&deg;F, two boron injection subsystems are required to ensure single functional capability in the event an assumed failure renders the flow path from one subsystem inoperable. The boration capability of either flow path is sufficient to provide the required SHUTDOWN MARGIN from expected operating conditions after xenon decay and cooldown to 200&#xba;F. The maximum expected boration capability requirement occurs at EOL from full power equilibrium xenon conditions and requires 15,700 gallons of 7000 ppm borated water from the boric acid storage tanks or 70,702 gallons of 2400 ppm borated water from the refueling water storage tank (RWST).
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                 B 13.1-2                                  Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES LCO                Two boration injection subsystems are defined as:
: 1.       Two of the following three injection flow paths: (a) the flow path from the boric acid storage tanks via either a boric acid transfer pump or a gravity feed connection and a charging pump to the RCS, and (b) two flow paths from the RWST via a centrifugal charging pump to the RCS, and,
: 2.       Two centrifugal charging pumps (Note 2 allows the use of the positive displacement pump in lieu of a centrifugal charging pump in Mode 4), and,
: 3.       One borated water source(s) (BAT and/or RWST) as required to support the injection flow paths of number 1 above.
The LCO is modified by Note 1, which allows operation in MODE 3 and 4 with CCPs made incapable of injecting pursuant to TS 3.4.12, "Low Temperature Overpressure Protection (LTOP) System," for up to 4 hours or until temperature of all RCS cold legs exceeds 375&deg;F. This allowance is necessary since the LTOP arming temperature is below the MODE 3 boundary temperature of 350&deg;F. Since TS 3.4.12 requires certain pumps be rendered incapable of injecting at and below the LTOP arming temperature, time is needed to restore the inoperable pumps to OPERABLE status following entry into MODE 3. This TRM Note is consistent with Note 2 to TS 3.5.2, "ECCS - Operating." The limitation for a maximum of two charging pumps to be OPERABLE and the requirement to verify one charging pump to be inoperable below 350&deg;F provides assurance that a mass addition pressure transient can be relieved by the operation of a single PORV.
An OPERABLE Boration Injection System is required to be capable of being manually aligned when boration is required, and in all cases within 15 minutes, to establish boration flow. When local manual control is being credited, administrative controls are utilized to ensure 1) appropriate personnel are aware of the status of the Boration Injection System, and 2) specified individuals are designated and readily available to perform the valve alignment necessary to establish boration flow.
APPLICABILITY      The OPERABILITY of two boration injection subsystems ensures that the Boration Injection System is available for reactivity control while the unit is operating in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.1-3                                  Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES ACTIONS            A.1 If one boration injection subsystem is inoperable (except due to an inoperable required charging pump), action must be taken to restore the subsystem to OPERABLE status. The 72 hour Completion Time takes into account the redundant capabilities afforded by the remaining OPERABLE boration injection subsystem and reasonable time for repairs. The Completion Time is consistent with the time allowed to restore an ECCS train to OPERABLE status.
B.1 If one boration injection subsystem is inoperable due to an inoperable charging pump, action must be taken to restore the required charging pump to OPERABLE status. The 7 day Completion Time takes into account the redundant capabilities afforded by the remaining OPERABLE charging pump and reasonable time for repairs.
C.1 and C.2 If both the required boration injection subsystems are inoperable the Boration Injection System may not be capable of supporting the negative reactivity control function. Therefore, immediate action must be taken to restore at least one subsystem to OPERABLE status. Action must continue until one boration subsystem is restored to OPERABLE status.
If both the required boration injection subsystems are inoperable or if an inoperable boration injection subsystem(s) cannot be returned to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time for reasons other than the inoperability of a required centrifugal charging pump, an engineering evaluation under the Corrective Action Program (CAP) is immediately initiated, consistent with TR 13.0, Applicability NOTE 1.
Using NRC guidance (e.g., Generic Letter 91-18) for resolution of degraded and nonconforming conditions, the engineering evaluation for continued operation should include a risk-informed assessment of current plant conditions (e.g., operating Mode, inoperable equipment, planned maintenance evolutions, etc.) and identify actions (compensatory and/or corrective) and associated completion times necessary to maintain the unit in a safe condition. Example compensatory actions while corrective actions are pursued might include suspension of activities that could result in positive reactivity changes if in Modes 3 or 4 or suspending high risk work activities if maintaining the unit at power.
If a required centrifugal charging pump cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the associated Completion Time, the (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-4                                    Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES LCO                C.1 and C.2 (continued) requirements of Technical Specification 3.5.2, Condition C should be applied if in MODES 1, 2 or 3; Technical Specification 3.5.3, Condition C should be applied if in MODE 4.
The need for additional conditions and actions, beyond those described in Conditions A and B, are to be controlled in accordance with the corrective action program until the equipment is restored to OPERABLE status. The provision for using the corrective action program to address situations beyond the TRM LCO Conditions is not intended to be used merely as an operational convenience to extend allowed outage time intervals beyond those specified.
TECHNICAL          TRS 13.1.31.1 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       This TRS requires verification that the boration flow path for the required BAT(s) and boron solution temperature of the required BAT(s) is greater than 65&deg;F. This temperature is sufficient to prevent boric acid crystal from precipitating for the highest allowed concentration of boric acid in the BATs.
The Frequency of 7 days for performance of the surveillance has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience and is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution temperature.
TRS 13.1.31.2 This TRS requires a verification of the boron solution concentration of the required BAT(s) every 7 days. The minimum boron solution concentration requirements of the required BAT(s), along with the boron solution volume requirements, ensure cold shutdown boron weight is available for injection (i.e., SDM equivalent to 1.3% 'k/k at 200&deg;F). The Frequency to verify boron concentration is appropriate since the BAT boron solution concentration is normally stable and has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience. In addition, the Frequency is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution concentration.
TRS 13.1.31.3 This surveillance requires verification that the BAT boron solution volume is at least 50%. The minimum boron solution volume, along with the (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-5                                  Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES TECHNICAL          TRS 13.1.31.3 (continued)
REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       boron solution concentration requirements, ensures cold shutdown boron weight is available for injection (i.e., SDM equivalent to 1.3% 'k/k at 200&deg;F). The boron solution volume limit of the RWST is specified in Technical Specification 3.5.4 and ensures sufficient volume is available to inject the required cold shutdown boron weight including any unusable volume. The 7 day Frequency to verify boron solution volume is appropriate since the BAT volumes are normally stable and has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience. In addition, the Frequency is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution volume.
TRS 13.1.31.4 Verifying the correct alignment for each boration injection subsystem manual, power operated, and automatic valve provides assurance that the proper flow paths exist for boration injection subsystem operation.
This TRS does not apply to valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, since they are verified to be in the correct position prior to being locked, sealed, or secured. A valve may be in the non boration injection position provided the valve is capable of being manually repositioned to the boration injection position. This TRS does does not require any testing or valve manipulation; rather, it involves verification that those valves capable of being mispositioned are in the correct position. This TRS does not apply to valves that cannot be inadvertently misaligned, such as check valves.
The 31 day Frequency is based on engineering judgment, is consistent with the procedural controls governing valve operation, and ensures correct valve position.
TRS 13.1.31.5 Verification that the flow path from the BATs delivers at least 30 gpm to the RCS demonstrates that gross degradation of the boric acid transfer pumps, CCPs, crystallization of boric acid in the boration injection subsystems, and other hydraulic component problems have not occurred. The 18 month Frequency was developed considering it is prudent that this Surveillance be performed during a plant outage. This is due to the plant conditions needed to perform the TRS and the potential for unplanned plant transients if the TRS is performed with the reactor at power.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-6                                   Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Operating TRB 13.1.31 BASES TECHNICAL          TRS 13.1.31.6 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       Periodic surveillance testing of CCPs to detect gross degradation caused (continued)       by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems is performed in accordance with Section XI of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Code. This type of testing may be accomplished by measuring the pump developed head at only one point of the pump characteristic curve. This verifies both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the plant safety analysis.
The activities and Frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements of this TRS are accomplished with the performance of SR 3.5.2.4.
TRS 13.1.31.7 Periodic surveillance testing of the positive displacement pump is performed to ensure that it meets the minimum flow requirements of the Boron Injection System when used in lieu of a CCP in Mode 4. This is accomplished by verifying that it delivers at least 30 gpm from a BAT to the RCS per TRS 13.1.31.5. The 18 month Frequency was developed considering it is prudent that this Surveillance be performed during a plant outage.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-7                                 Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TRB 13.1.32 B 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TRB 13.1.32 Boration Injection System - Shutdown BASES BACKGROUND            A description of the Boration Injection System is provided in the Bases for TR 13.31.1, Boration Injection System - Operating.
The components required to perform this function in MODES 5 and 6 include: (1) a borated water source, (2) pump(s), (3) a functional flow path and (4) the associated train Class 1E bus power supply.
As listed below, the required indicated levels for the boric acid storage tanks and the RWST include allowances for required/analytical volume, unusable volume, measurement uncertainties (which include instrument error and tank tolerances, as applicable), margin, and other required volume.
Tank     MODES      Ind. Unusable  Required  Measurement   Margin   Other Level    Volume    Volume     Uncertainty (gal)     (gal)                  (gal)    (gal)
RWST       5, 6     24%     98,900     7,113     4% of span  10,293     N/A BAT       5, 6     10%      3,221     1,100     6% of span    N/A      N/A 5, 6     20%      3,221     1,100     6% of span   3,679     N/A (gravity feed)
APPLICABLE            The boration subsystem is not assumed to be OPERABLE to mitigate the SAFETY ANALYSES       consequences of a DBA or transient. However, the boration injection subsystem satisfies, in part, General Design Criteria 26. In the case of a malfunction of the Chemical and Volume Control System (CVCS), which caused a boron dilution event, an appropriate response by the operator is to isolate the source of primary water makeup.
The boron injection capability requirement in conjunction with the cooldown capability identified in Branch Technical Position RSB 5-1 ensures the ability to reach cold shutdown conditions within a reasonable time period.
In the determination of the required combination of boration flow rate and boron concentration, there is no unique requirement that must be satisfied. Since it is imperative to raise the boron concentration of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) as soon as possible, the boron (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.1-8                                  Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TRB 13.1.32 BASES APPLICABLE         concentration should be a highly concentrated solution, such as that SAFETY ANALYSES    normally found in the boric acid storage tank, or the Reactor Water (continued)       Storage Tank (RWST). The operator should borate with the best source available for the plant conditions.
With the RCS temperature below 200&deg;F, one boron injection subsystem is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the additional restrictions prohibiting CORE ALTERATIONS and positive reactivity changes in the event the single boron injection subsystem becomes inoperable.
The TS 3.4.12 limitation for a maximum of two charging pumps to be OPERABLE below 350&deg;F provides assurance that a mass addition pressure transient can be relieved by the operation of a single PORV.
The boron capability required below 200&deg;F is sufficient to provide the required SHUTDOWN MARGIN after xenon decay and cooldown from 200&deg;F to 140&deg;F. This condition requires either 1,100 gallons of 7000 ppm borated water from the boric acid storage tanks or 7,113 gallons of 2400 ppm borated water from the RWST.
LCO                In MODES 5 and 6, one boration injection subsystem is required to be OPERABLE to provide a boration flow path to allow immediate boration in the event SDM is discovered to be outside the Technical Specification limit. To ensure reliability is maintained in the event of a loss of the normal AC power source, the required boration injection subsystem must be capable of being powered from an OPERABLE emergency power source. One boration injection subsystem is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the relatively stable reactivity condition of the reactor.
For the required boration injection subsystem to be considered OPERABLE, all of the following are required:
: a.       An injection flow path (1) from the required boric acid storage tank via either a boric acid transfer pump or a gravity feed connection and a charging pump to the RCS, or (2) from the RWST via a charging pump to the RCS, and
: b.       Either a centrifugal charging pump or positive displacement charging pump, and
: c.       A borated water source from either a BAT or the RWST.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.1-9                                   Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TRB 13.1.32 BASES LCO                An OPERABLE Boration Injection System is required to be capable of (continued)       being manually aligned when boration is required, and in all cases within 15 minutes, to establish boration flow. When local manual control is being credited, administrative controls are utilized to ensure 1) appropriate personnel are aware of the status of the Boration Injection System, and 2) specified individuals are designated and readily available to perform the valve alignment necessary to establish boration flow.
APPLICABILITY      In MODE 5 SDM is required to ensure the reactor will be held subcritical with margin for the most reactive Rod Control Cluster Assembly fully withdrawn. SDM is required in MODE 6 to prevent an open vessel inadvertent criticality. As such, the OPERABILITY of one boron injection subsystem ensures reactivity control is available while in MODES 5 and
: 6. Boration Injection System requirements in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 are addressed in TR 13.1.31, "Boration Injection System - Operating."
ACTIONS            A. 1 With the required boration injection subsystem inoperable or the boration injection subsystem not capable of being powered by an OPERABLE emergency power source, the operator must immediately suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in loss of required SDM or loss of required boron concentration. The Required Actions minimize the potential for inadvertent criticality.
Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum SDM or boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory may allow dilution of the RCS but the source of makeup water is required to contain sufficient boron concentration such that when mixed with the RCS inventory the resulting boron concentration in the RCS meets the minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation. Introduction of temperature changes including temperature increases when operating with a positive MTC must also be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of required SDM.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-10                                 Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TRB 13.1.32 BASES TECHNICAL          TRS 13.1.32.1 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       This TRS requires verification that the boron solution temperature of the required RWST is greater than 40&deg;F. This temperature is sufficient to prevent boric acid crystals from precipitating out of solution at the highest allowed concentration of boric acid in the RWST.
The Frequency of 24 hours for performance of the surveillance has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience and is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution temperature.
TRS 13.1.32.2 See Bases for TRS 13.1.31.1 TRS 13.1.32.3 See Bases for TRS 13.1.31.2 TRS 13.1.32.4 and TRS 13.1.32.5 This surveillance requires verification that the BAT boron solution volume is at least 10% when using the boric acid pump from the boric acid storage tank or 20% when using gravity feed from the boric acid storage tank. The minimum boron solution volume, along with the boron solution concentration requirements, ensures cold shutdown boron weight is available for injection (e.g., SDM equivalent to 1.3% 'k/k at 200&deg;F). The 7 day Frequency to verify boron solution volume is appropriate since the BAT volumes are normally stable and has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience. In addition, the Frequency is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution volume.
TRS 13.1.32.6 and TRS 13.1.32.7 This surveillance requires verification that the RWST solution boron concentration is at least 2400 ppm and the indicated boron solution volume is at least 24%. The minimum boron solution volume, along with the boron solution concentration requirements, ensures cold shutdown boron weight is available for injection (e.g., SDM equivalent to 1.3% 'k/k at 200&deg;F). The 7 day Frequency to verify boron solution volume is appropriate since the RWST volume is normally stable and has been shown to be acceptable through operating experience. In addition, the Frequency is consistent with the Technical Specification surveillance Frequency for verifying the RWST boron solution concentration and volume in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.1-11                                  Revision 65

Boration Injection System - Shutdown TRB 13.1.32 BASES TECHNICAL          TRS 13.1.32.8 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       See Bases for TRS 13.1.31.4 (continued)
TRS 13.1.32.9 See Bases for TRS 13.1.31.7 TRS 13.1.32.10 See Bases for TRS 13.1.31.6 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM          B 13.1-12                            Revision 65

Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator TRB 13.1.37 B 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TRB 13.1.37 Rod Group Alignment Limits and Rod Position Indicator BASES Related requirements/information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.1.4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                B 13.1-13                                Revision 65

Control Bank Insertion Limits TRB 13.1.38 B 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TRB 13.1.38 Control Bank Insertion Limits BASES Related requirements/information is found in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.1.6.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                B 13.1-14                                Revision 65

Rod Position Indication - Shutdown TRB 13.1.39 B 13.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS TRB 13.1.39 Rod Position Indication - Shutdown BASES Related requirements/information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.1.7.
The following discussion is provided to clarify TR 13.1.39 APPLICABILITY.
Control rod testing includes the following independent but related activities:
: 1.       Digital Position Indication System (DRPI) testing per SR 3.1.7.1 and TRS 13.1.39.1,
: 2.       Control rod drop timing per SR 3.1.4.3, and
: 3.       Control Rod Drive Mechanism (CRDM) step traces, which is not a Surveillance Requirement, but is an integral part of control rod functional testing.
These activities may be performed independently or concurrently.
If Keff is maintained d 0.95, and no more than one shutdown or control bank is withdrawn from the fully inserted position, control rods may be withdrawing in MODES 3, 4, and 5 for any reason.
The limitations on Keff and control rod bank withdrawal are consistent with assumptions made in the design calculations that determine the boron concentration necessary to provide assurance that inadvertent criticality will be avoided.
Once DRPI is declared OPERABLE for all shutdown and control banks, the requirement for Keff d 0.95 is removed. This allows for significantly reduced boron concentration in preparation for plant startup activities.
One CPSES approved method of measuring rod drop times is an established industry method that produces DRPI coil voltage traces. The standard procedure withdraws one shutdown or control bank at a time. DRPI shall be available (but may or may not be OPERABLE) during the withdrawal of the rods, with the limitations on Keff described above. The data necessary to generate DRPI coil voltage traces is obtained from the induced voltage in the position indicator coils as the rod is dropped. The induced voltage is small compared to normal voltage and cannot be observed if DRPI remains energized and OPERABLE. With the rods fully withdrawn, DRPI is de-energized, rendering it inoperable, and the reactor trip breakers are opened to drop the rods.
Once the rods have been dropped, DRPI is energized again.
Another CPSES approved method of measuring rod drop times uses the Plant Process Computer (PPC). The PPC method relies on normal operating DRPI indications to determine the time a control rod reaches a specified position. DRPI shall be available (but may or may not be OPERABLE) during the withdrawal of the rods, with the limitations on Keff described above.
DRPI remains energized during testing.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.1-15                                 Revision 65

Moveable Incore Detection System TRB 13.2.31 B 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TRB 13.2.31 Moveable Incore Detection System BASES The OPERABILITY of the movable incore detectors with the specified minimum complement of equipment ensures that the measurements obtained from use of this system accurately represent the spatial neutron flux distribution of the core. The OPERABILITY of this system is demonstrated by irradiating each detector used and determining the acceptability of its voltage N
curve. For the purpose of measuring FQ(Z) or F 'H a full incore flux map is used. Quarter-core flux maps, as defined in WCAP-8648, June 1976, may be used in recalibration of the Excore Neutron Flux Detection System, and full incore flux maps or symmetric incore thimbles may be used for monitoring the QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO when one Power Range channel is inoperable.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.2-1                              Revision 68

AFD TRB 13.2.32 B 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TRB 13.2.32 Axial Flux Difference (AFD)
BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.2.3 A Note in the Frequency for Technical Requirement Surveillance (TRS) 13.2.32.1 relaxes the requirement of logging Axial Flux Difference (AFD) data for 24 hours after the AFD Monitor is restored. The plant computer is capable of retaining AFD historical data in the event of a computer failure and will accept new data after it is restored to service such that it does not need to operate for 24 hours in order to create the 24 hour history required for AFD monitoring.
In the event the AFD Monitor Alarm is inoperable, TRM Surveillance 13.2.32.1 requires logging the AFD value with a specific frequency. The purpose of the logging function is for the calculation of AFD penalty minutes for which a 24 hour history is required. The requirement to periodically monitor the AFD indication is not relaxed nor is the requirement to comply with the AFD penalty minute limitations of TS 3.2.3 affected.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.2-2                                    Revision 68

QPTR Alarm TRB 13.2.33 B 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TRB 13.2.33 Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (QPTR) Alarm BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.2.4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  B 13.2-3                          Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TRB 13.2.34 B 13.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS TRB 13.2.34 Power Distribution Monitoring System BASES BACKGROUND        The Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) generates a continuous measurement of the core power distribution using the methodology documented in Reference 1. The measured core power distribution is used to determine the most limiting core peaking factors, FNH and FQ(Z). The most limiting measured core peaking factor values are used to verify that the reactor is operating within design limits.
The PDMS requires information on current plant and core conditions in order to determine the core power distribution using the core peaking factor measurement and measurement uncertainty methodology described in Reference 1. The core and plant condition information is used as input to the continuous core power distribution measurement software that continuously and automatically determines the current core peaking factor values.
In order for the PDMS to accurately determine the peaking factor values, the core power distribution measurement software requires accurate information about the current reactor power level, average reactor vessel inlet temperature, control bank positions, the Power Range Detector calibrated voltage or current values, and the measured Core Exit Thermocouples (T/C). At least 13 of the T/C must be OPERABLE at all times for PDMS OPERABILITY.
APPLICABLE        The PDMS is used for periodic measurement of the core power distribution SAFETY            to confirm operation within the design limit, and periodic calibration of the ANALYSES          excore detectors. This system does not initiate any automatic protection action. The PDMS is not assumed to be OPERABLE to mitigate the consequences of a DBA or transient (Reference 2).
LCO               The TR LCO requires the PDMS to be OPERABLE with the specified number of channel inputs from the plant computer for each Function listed in Table 13.2.34-1.
This ensures that the measured plant and core condition information input to the core power distribution measurement software with the PDMS OPERABLE is adequate to accurately calculate the core peaking factors.
The peaking factor calculations include measurement uncertainty which bounds the actual measurement uncertainty of an OPERABLE PDMS.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               B 13.2-4                                   Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TRB 13.2.34 BASES (continued)
APPLICABILITY     In order for the PDMS to be used for the listed functions, the reactor must be in MODE 1 and > 25% RTP. The PDMS must be calibrated above 25%
RTP to assure the accuracy of the calibration data set which can be generated from the incore flux map, core exit thermocouples, and other input channels. Below 25% RTP, the PDMS may not be used for the listed functions since the calculated power distribution is of reduced accuracy and may not be used to demonstrate compliance with the LCO limits.
ACTIONS           A.1 With one or more PDMS components or required plant computer inputs inoperable, the PDMS may not be used for the applicable monitoring and calibration functions until the required inputs are restored to an OPERABLE status.
Control bank position inputs may be bank positions from either 1) valid Demand Position indications or 2) the average of all valid individual RCCA positions in the bank determined from Rod Position Indication (RPI) System values for each Control Bank. A maximum of 1 rod position indicator may be inoperable when RCCA position indications are being used as input to the PDMS.
Reactor Power Level inputs may be reactor thermal power derived from either a valid secondary calorimetric measurement, the average Power Range Neutron Flux Power, or the average N-16 Power.
The total number of Excore Detectors must consist of at least 3 pairs of corresponding upper and lower detector section signals.
TECHNICAL         TRS 13.2.34.1 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE      Performance of a CHANNEL CHECK prior to using the PDMS to obtain a core power distribution measurement ensures that a gross instrumentation failure has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value.
Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus it is key to verifying the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.2-5                                    Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TRB 13.2.34 BASES TECHNICAL        TRS 13.2.34.1 (continued)
REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE     The Frequency is based on the need to establish that the required inputs to the PDMS are valid prior to using the PDMS to obtain a core power distribution measurement to be used to confirm that the reactor is operating within design limits.
TRS 13.2.34.2 Upon initial plant startup following refueling, the PDMS uses a calibration data set calculated by the core designer for the new core.
An accurate incore flux map for PDMS calibration may be obtained upon exceeding 25% RTP. The initial calibration data set generated in each operating cycle must utilize incore flux measurements from at least 75% of the incore thimbles, with at least two incore thimbles in each core quadrant.
The incore flux measurements in combination with inputs from the Table 13.2.34-1 channels (which have been calibrated/tested in accordance with TRS 13.2.34.3 and TRS 13.2.34.4) are used to generate the updated calibration data set, including the nodal calibration factors and the thermocouple mixing factors.
Following the initial calibration discussed above, the calibration data set must utilize incore flux measurements from at least 50% of the detector thimbles with at least 2 detector thimbles per core quadrant.
Following the initial calibration discussed above, the required frequency is 31 EFPD when the minimum core exit thermocouple coverage is available for the PDMS calibration. The minimum thermocouple coverage consists of 13 thermocouples with a minimum of two per core quadrant.
The required frequency is 180 EFPD when the optimum core exit thermocouple coverage is available for the PDMS calibration. The optimum thermocouple coverage is defined by all interior fuel assemblies (non-peripheral) have an OPERABLE Core Exit Thermocouple within at least a chess knights move.
TRS 13.2.34.3 and 13.2.34.4 A CHANNEL CALIBRATION (or CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST) is verified to have been performed prior to using the PDMS to measure the core power distribution, and every 24 months, or approximately at every refueling. The test or calibration verifies that the channel responds to a (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.2-6                                  Revision 68

Power Distribution Monitoring System TRB 13.2.34 BASES TECHNICAL        TRS 13.2.34.3 and 13.2.34.4 (continued)
REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE     measured parameter with the necessary range and accuracy. TRS 13.2.34.3 is modified by a note stating that neutron detectors are excluded form the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the power range neutron detectors consists of a normalization of the detectors based on a power calorimetric and power distribution measurement. The required frequency is based on operating experience and consistency with the typical industry refueling cycle.

==REFERENCES:==
: 1.      WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994.
: 2.      10 CFR 50.46.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.2-7                                Revision 68

RTS Instrumentation Response Times TRB 13.3.1 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.1 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation Response Times BASES The bases for the Reactor Trip System are contained in the CPSES Technical Specifications.
The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the Reactor trip actuation associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses. No credit was taken in the analyses for those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel test measurements provided that such tests demonstrate the total channel response time as defined. Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either: (1) in place, onsite, or offsite test measurements, or (2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response time.
The overall response time limit for the overtemperature N-16 reactor trip function is 8 seconds, as noted in TRM Table 13.3.1-1, Item 6. Note 2 clarifies that a maximum of 6 seconds is allowed for the RTD/thermal well response time, as described in FSAR Table 15.0-4. Taken together with the overall response time requirement of 8 seconds, the allowed response time components (RTD/thermal well and electronic) are specified in a manner consistent with the accident analyses.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     B 13.3-1                                  Revision 70

ESFAS Instrumentation Response Times TRB 13.3.2 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.2 Engineered Safety Features Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Response Times BASES The bases for the Engineered Safety Features Actuation System are contained in the CPSES Technical Specifications. The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the Engineered Safety Features actuation associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses. No credit was taken in the analyses for those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel test measurements provided that such tests demonstrate the total channel response time as defined.
Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either: (1) in place, onsite, or offsite test measurements, or (2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response time.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.3-2                                  Revision 70

LOP DG Start Instrumentation Response Times TRB 13.3.5 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.5 Loss of Power (LOP) Diesel Generator (DG) Start Instrumentation Response Times BASES TRM Table 13.3.5-1 contains the initiation signals and function response time limits for the LOP DG Start Instrumentation. The response time limits for each function are consistent with the analytical limits presented in the FSAR, Chapter 15.
The Chapter 15 Accident Analysis contains separate analyses for the Design Basis Accident (DBA) and Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) events. CPSES assumes these events to occur independently of each other and does not postulate the simultaneous occurrence of a Design Basis Accident (DBA) and a Loss of Offsite Power.
For purposes of accident analysis however, CPSES conservatively assumes a LOOP concurrent with a turbine trip. All DBAs, with the exception of Feedwater Line Break (FWLB), generate an immediate Safety Injection Actuation Signal (SIAS) with a resultant DG start initiation, reactor trip, turbine trip, and an assumed LOOP. For the FWLB, the DG is postulated to start from a LOOP signal. The response times for the LOP DG Start Instrumentation assure that on a LOOP, the DG will start in sufficient time to meet the 60 second requirement for Auxiliary Feedwater Pump (AFWP) running for mitigation of the FWLB.
CPSES provides for equipment protection due to sustained degraded or low grid voltage conditions. However, the CPSES accident analysis does not assume degraded grid conditions to occur simultaneously with a DBA. For conservatism, safety buses are promptly isolated from an established degraded grid or low grid condition upon the subsequent occurrence of an SIAS.
Response time requirements for LOP DG Start Instrumentation assure that, on occurrence of an SIAS subsequent to an established degraded or low grid condition, the safety buses are isolated from the degraded or low grid condition in sufficient time to allow for the closure of the DG output circuit breaker to the safety bus within 10 seconds from the receipt of the SIAS start signal by the DG.
The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the Loss of Power features associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses. No credit was taken in the analyses for those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel test measurements provided that such tests demonstrate the total channel response time as defined. Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either: (1) in place, onsite, or offsite test measurements, or (2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response time.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.3-3                                   Revision 70

Seismic Instrumentation TRB 13.3.31 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.31 Seismic Instrumentation BASES The OPERABILITY of the seismic monitoring system ensures that sufficient capability is available to promptly determine whether the OBE has been exceeded and to collect information to evaluate the response of features important to safety. This capability is required pursuant to Appendix A of 10CFR100. The instrumentation provided meets the intent of Regulatory Guide 1.12, Instrumentation for Earthquakes, April 1974, as described in the FSAR. The seismic monitoring system will record and analyze a seismic event to determine OBE exceedance in accordance with the requirements described in the FSAR.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.3-4                                   Revision 70

RTS Instrumentation - Source Range Neutron Flux TRB 13.3.32 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.32 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation - Source Range Neutron Flux BASES Technical Specification 3.3.1 requires the source range reactor trip function to be OPERABLE in Modes 3, 4 and 5, when the Rod Control System is capable of rod withdrawal or all control rods are not fully inserted. However, when in the converse condition, i.e., the Rod Control System is not capable of rod withdrawal and all control rods are fully inserted, the source range neutron flux channels are only required to be available to monitor the reactivity state of the core; however, no reactor trip function is required.
The primary function of the source range neutron flux monitors in Modes 3, 4, and 5, when the source range reactor trip function is not required to be OPERABLE per TS 3.3.1, is to provide a visual signal to alert the operator to unexpected changes in core reactivity such as an inadvertent boron dilution accident, an unexpected moderator temperature change or an improperly loaded fuel assembly. Either the set of two Westinghouse-supplied BF3 source range detectors or the set of two Gamma-Metrics Neutron Flux Monitoring System channels may be used to perform this reactivity-monitoring function.
The CPSES design includes two separate systems for monitoring the neutron flux. The Westinghouse portion of the system consists of three instrumentation ranges: the Source Range, Intermediate Range and the Power Range. Each portion consists of detectors, power supplies, signal processing equipment and indicators. The Westinghouse source range neutron flux monitors provide audio and visual indications of neutron count rate. The audible output provides a warning in the main control room and containment of any potentially hazardous condition. However, with the implementation of CPSES TS Amendment 64, (the Improved Technical Specifications), the audible count indication was deleted as a requirement for the source range neutron flux monitors.
A separate Gamma-Metrics Neutron Flux Monitoring System (NFMS) is installed to satisfy the requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.97, Instrumentation For Light-Watered-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants To Assess Plant And Environs Conditions During And Following An Accident. The Gamma-Metrics NFMS monitors neutron flux from the source range through 200% Rated Thermal Power (RTP) during all Modes of plant operation. This system utilizes two separate (Class 1E) fission chamber neutron detectors for all ranges of neutron flux indication. Specific requirements for this function of the Gamma-Metrics NFMS are contained in Technical Specification 3.3.4.
Both the Westinghouse source range neutron flux monitors and the Gamma-Metrics Neutron Monitoring System are functionally equivalent and both are qualified to Class 1E standards.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.3-5                                   Revision 70

RTS Instrumentation - Source Range Neutron Flux TRB 13.3.32 BASES (continued)
The channel check performed on the Gamma-Metrics detectors verifies the actual process signal as it is input to the sensor. Because of the inherent nature of the statistical emission of source range neutrons from the reactor core, the process signal provides an observable fluctuation that is visible on the end devices (control room instrumentation). Furthermore, there are no alarm, interlock or trip functions associated with these channels. Therefore, a Channel Operability Test is not required for the Gamma-Metrics detectors.
Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.3.1 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                     B 13.3-6                                  Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.33 Turbine Overspeed Protection BASES BACKGROUND           This specification is provided to ensure that the turbine overspeed protection instrumentation and the turbine Stop and Control Valves are operable and will protect the turbine from excessive overspeed.
Protection from excessive overspeed is necessary to prevent the generation of potentially damaging missiles which could impact and damage safety-related components, equipment and structures. Turbine overspeed is limited by rapid closure of the turbine Stop or Control Valves whenever turbine power exceeds generator output, as would exist immediately following a load rejection.
The Electrohydraulic Control (EHC) System is the primary means of limiting the extent of an overspeed event, with the turbine Overspeed Protection System as a backup. The EHC System is designed to limit transient overspeed to less than 110% of rated speed after a full load rejection by closing both the High Pressure (HP) and Low Pressure (LP)
Control Valves. This function of the EHC System is performed by the normal speed/load control logic in conjunction with additional protection logic that ensures closure of all control valves under certain load rejection scenarios (Reference 1).
To minimize the possibility of a component failure resulting in a loss of the control function, the EHC System utilizes triple redundant speed and load inputs, dual redundant digital controller processors, and dual redundant outputs (amplifiers, proportional valves, and follow-up piston banks) to the Control Valves.
In the unlikely event that the EHC System fails to limit the overspeed condition, the Overspeed Protection System will act to limit the overspeed to less than 120% of rated speed.
The Overspeed Protection System is made up of the following basic component groups:
* Independent and redundant speed sensors and associated signal processing instrumentation, including bistables, provide individual speed channel trip signals to the Turbine AG-95F Digital Protection System and the hardware overspeed trip system (both described below) whenever turbine speed exceeds 1980 rpm.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                B 13.3-7                                  Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES BACKGROUND
* The Turbine AG-95F Digital Protection System consists of three (continued)               independent and redundant trains of equipment, including input modules, dual redundant automation processors and associated software, output modules, and output relays. The AG-95F System is a fail-safe system in that all inputs and outputs are normally energized in the non-tripped state.
Each train of the AG-95F System processes the individual speed channel trip signals using 2 of 3 trip logic. When the trip logic is satisfied, the associated output relays de-energize, each one subsequently de-energizing its associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve.
* The Relay Protection System consists of relay logic and output relays that are diverse from, and completely bypass, the AG-95F Digital Protection System described above. The logic and output relays are normally energized in the non-gripped state.
The relay logic processes the individual speed channel trip signals using 2 of 3 trip logic. When the trip logic is satisfied, all three output relays de-energize, each one subsequently de-energizing its associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve.
* The Turbine Trip Block utilizes three independent and redundant solenoid valves to actuate associated hydraulic pistons that are configured in a manner that provides a hydraulic 2 of 3 trip logic.
When any two of the three solenoid valves de-energize, actuation of the associated pistons rapidly de-pressurizes the turbine Trip Fluid System, causing all turbine Stop and Control Valves to close. De-energization of a single solenoid valve will not trip the turbine.
The Overspeed Protection System consists of two redundant and diverse sub-systems, the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and the Software Overspeed Sub-system, that are configured using the component groups described above. Either of these sub-systems can independently trip the turbine.
The Hardware Overspeed Sub-system utilizes a set of three dedicated speed channels, each of which provides a trip signal to the Relay Protection System. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the relay logic de-energizes all three output relays which subsequently de-energize all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.3-8                                   Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES BACKGROUND         As a backup, the three dedicated Hardware Overspeed Sub-system (continued)       speed channels also provide trip signals to all three of the AG-95F System protection trains. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the output relay of each protection train is de-energized, subsequently de-energizing all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip.
The Software Overspeed Sub-system utilizes a second set of three dedicated speed channels which provide input to all three of AG-95F System protection trains. Upon receipt of trip signals from any two of these speed channels, the output relay of each protection train is de-energized, subsequently de-energizing all three Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves, causing the turbine to trip. The Software Overspeed System speed channels also provide speed signals to the EHC System as described above.
The design of the Overspeed Protection System includes several testing features that are used to ensure OPERABILITY of the system. These features include three Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT) tests that are manually initiated by the operator. They also include a test that is automatically executed by the system to ensure OPERABILITY of the speed channel instrumentation.
The ATT HP and LP Valve Tests cycle all Stop and Control Valves to ensure reliability and continuity of service. The HP and LP Stop Valve closure times are also verified to be within required response times (500 and 1500 msec, respectively). These tests cycle one pair of Stop and Control Valves at a time, so they may be performed with the plant on-line below approximately 85% power.
The ATT Turbine Trip Block Test de-energizes each Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve and verifies that the associated hydraulic piston moves to the trip position. The solenoid valve/piston pairs are sequentially tested one at a time, until all three are tested. Each pair is reset prior to testing the subsequent pair. Since only one solenoid valve/piston pair is tested at a time, the Trip Fluid System is never de-pressurized, and the turbine does not trip.
Each of the six individual speed channels (three for the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and three for the Software Overspeed Sub-system), is automatically tested once every 24 hours when turbine speed is >40 rpm. These tests verify that the speed channels trip when speed is simulated above 1980 rpm. The tests are initiated by the AG-95F (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.3-9                                    Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES BACKGROUND         System in a manner that precludes two speed channels from being (continued)       tested at the same time. If desired, the speed channel tests may also be initiated by the operator.
Alarms are provided to alert the operator in the event of a fault/failure is detected during the execution of any of the aforementioned tests.
APPLICABLE         The Overspeed Protection System is required to be OPERABLE to SAFETY ANALYSES    provide sufficient protection against generation of potentially damaging missiles which could impact and damage safety-related components, equipment and structures. The turbine missile analysis is presented in Reference 2. Using References 3 and 5 as a basis, this analysis concludes that the risk for loss of an essential system due to a turbine missile event is acceptably low.
The robust design of the Overspeed Protection System, with its multiple speed channels, diverse hardware and software logic, and multiple Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/hydraulic pistons, meets the intent of SRP 10.2 Part III for redundancy and independence.
LCO                The Turbine Overspeed Protection Sub-systems are the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system and the Software Overspeed Sub-system, one of which shall be OPERABLE.
The robust design of these sub-systems allows for the failure of individual components without rendering the sub-system(s) inoperable.
Specifically, the minimum operability requirements for the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system include:
* two OPERABLE dedicated hardware speed channels, and associated OPERABLE hardware relay logic with two OPERABLE output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/hydraulic pistons OR
* two OPERABLE dedicated hardware speed channels and two associated OPERABLE AG-95F System trains, including output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/
hydraulic pistons (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.3-10                                 Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES LCO                The minimum operability requirements for the Software Overspeed Sub-(continued)        system include:
* two OPERABLE dedicated software speed channels and two associated OPERABLE AG-95F System trains, including output relays and associated Turbine Trip Block solenoid valves/
hydraulic pistons Individual component failures that do not render the sub-system(s) inoperable are addressed under the Corrective Action Program (CAP) with restoration times commensurate with the severity of the failure and the operational impact associated with the rework or repair.
Furthermore, component failures that result in rendering only one Overspeed Protection Sub-system inoperable are also addressed under the CAP with restoration times commensurate with the severity of the failure and the operational impact associated with the rework or repair.
The OPERABILITY of one Overspeed Protection Sub-system ensures that the Overspeed Protection System is available to prevent an overspeed event while the unit is operating in MODE 1, 2, and 3 with steam available to roll the turbine. The APPLICABILITY is modified by a Note specifying that Overspeed Protection Sub-system OPERABILITY is not required in MODE 2 and 3 if the turbine is isolated from the steam supply by closing all Main Steam Isolation Valves and associated bypass valves.
ACTIONS            A.1, A.2, and A.3 This ACTION is modified by a Note that specifies that separate Condition entries are allowed for each steam line if valves are inoperable in multiple steam lines.
If a HP Stop or Control Valve is inoperable such that it is not capable of properly isolating the steam line to the turbine in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status. Failure to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours requires that compensatory action be taken within the following 6 hours to ensure that the affected steam line is isolated by other means.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.3-11                                 Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES ACTIONS            A.1, A.2, and A.3 (continued)
The 72 hour Completion Time for restoring the valve(s) takes into account the OPERABILITY of the remaining valve in the affected steam line and reasonable time for rework or repair. The 6 hour compensatory action Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
B.1, B.2, and B.3 This ACTION is modified by a Note that specifies that separate Condition entries are allowed for each steam line if valves are inoperable in multiple steam lines.
If a LP Stop or Control Valve is inoperable such that it is not capable of properly isolating the steam line to the turbine in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status. Failure to restore the valve(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours requires that compensatory action be taken within the following 6 hours to ensure that the affected steam line is isolated by other means.
The 72 hour Completion Time for restoring the valve(s) takes into account the OPERABILITY of the remaining valve in the affected steam line and reasonable time for rework or repair. The 6 hour compensatory action Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
C.1 If both Overspeed Protection Sub-systems are inoperable, such that neither is capable of initiating a turbine trip in response to an overspeed event, action must be taken within 6 hours to isolate the turbine from the steam supply.
The 6 hour Completion Time for isolating the turbine from the steam supply is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required unit conditions from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM              B 13.3-12                                    Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES ACTIONS            D.1, D.2, and D.3 (continued)
In the event that the aforementioned ACTIONS and associated Completion Times cannot be satisfied, action must be initiated within 1 hour to place the unit in a lower MODE, with subsequent action to place the unit in MODE 3 within the following 6 hours and to place the unit in MODE 4 within 6 hours after entering MODE 3. The need to perform these actions would most likely result from the inability to isolate the turbine from the steam supply. Placing the unit in MODE 4 will reduce steam pressure to the point where there is insufficient motive force to overspeed the turbine, even if it is not isolated from the steam generators.
The Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 and MODE 4 from full power operation in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
TECHNICAL          The TRS 13.3.33 requirements are modified by a Note that specifies that REQUIREMENTS       the provisions of TRS 13.0.4 are not applicable.
SURVEILLANCE TRS 13.3.33.1 This TRS specifies testing of the Turbine Trip Block using the Automatic Turbine Tester (ATT). This test de-energizes each Turbine Trip Block solenoid valve and verifies that the associated hydraulic piston moves to trip position. The solenoid valve/piston pairs are sequentially tested one at a time, until all three are tested. Each pair is reset prior to testing the subsequent pair. Since only one solenoid valve/piston pair is tested at a time, the Trip Fluid System is never de-pressurized, and the turbine does not trip.
The 14 day test Frequency is based on the assumptions in the analyses presented in Reference 2.
TRS 13.3.33.2 This TRS specifies testing of the turbine HP and LP Stop and Control Valves using the manual test or the ATT. These tests cycle all Stop and Control Valves to ensure reliability and continuity of service. The HP and LP Stop Valve closure times are also verified to be within required response times (500 and 1500 msec, respectively). These tests cycle one pair of Stop and Control Valves at a time, so they may be performed with the plant on-line below approximately 85% power.
The 26 week test Frequency is based on the assumptions in the analyses presented in Reference 2 and 5.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                B 13.3-13                                   Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES TECHNICAL          TRS 13.3.33.3 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       This TRS has been deleted.
(continued)
TRS 13.3.33.4 This TRS requires disassembly and inspection of at least one HP Stop Valve and one HP Control Valve on a 40 month Frequency to satisfy the turbine inservice inspection requirements described in Reference 6.
TRS 13.3.33.5 This TRS requires inspection of at least one LP Stop Valve and one LP Control Valve on a 40 month Frequency to satisfy the turbine inservice inspection requirements described in Reference 6.
TRS 13.3.33.6 This TRS requires a test of the Hardware Overspeed Sub-system 2 of 3 relay logic and output relays to ensure that this equipment is capable of processing an overspeed turbine trip signal on demand.
This equipment cannot be tested with the unit at power because performance of the test will trip the turbine. The 18 month test Frequency is consistent with Technical Specification test Frequencies assigned to similar equipment, and it affords the opportunity to test the equipment while the unit is shutdown. This test Frequency is judged to be acceptable based on the reliability of the equipment.

==REFERENCES:==
: 1.      CPSES FSAR, Section 10.2.2.7.
: 2.      CPSES FSAR, Section 3.5.1.3.
: 3.      Engineering Report No. ER-504, Probability of Turbine Missiles from 1800 R/MIN Nuclear Steam Turbine-Generators with 44
                           -Inch Last Stage Turbine Blades, Allis-Chalmers (Siemens)
Power Systems, Inc, October 1975.
: 4.      Deleted.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM              B 13.3-14                                 Revision 70

Turbine Overspeed Protection TRB 13.3.33 BASES

==REFERENCES:==
: 5. CT-27331, Revision 5, Missile Probability Analysis Methodology (continued)              for TXU Generation Company LP, Comanche Peak Units 1 and 2 with Siemens Retrofit Turbines, Siemens Westinghouse Power Corporation, January 18, 2007.
: 6. CPSES FSAR, Section 10.2.3.6.
===================1 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM           B 13.3-15                                 Revision 70

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TRB 13.3.34 B 13.3 INSTRUMENTATION TRB 13.3.34 Plant Calorimetric Measurement BASES BACKGROUND           The predominant contribution to the secondary plant calorimetric measurement uncertainty is the uncertainty associated with the feedwater flow measurement. Traditionally, a differential pressure ('P) transmitter across a venturi in each main feedwater line has been used to provide the feedwater flow. However, the venturis are subject to corrosion or fouling and the uncertainty associated with the flow derived from the 'P indication can be large and increases as the flow deviates from the optimum conditions for which the 'P transmitter was calibrated.
More recently, leading edge flow meters (LEFMs) have been used to provide the feedwater flow input to the secondary plant calorimetric measurement. The uncertainty associated with the LEFM is relatively small and is independent of the actual feedwater flow.
The power calorimetric uncertainty associated with the use of the feedwater venturis is less than +2.0% RATED THERMAL POWER (RTP) for a measurement taken near full power. The uncertainty associated with the LEFM instrumentation is +0.6% RTP.
The accident analyses are performed at a nominal RTP of 3612 MWth plus an uncertainty allowance of +0.6% RTP based on the availability of the LEFM instrument. If the LEFM is unavailable, the uncertainties associated with the feedwater venturi-based measurement (+2% RTP) must be used to ensure compliance with the safety analysis value of the core power. This reduced power level is 3562 MWth. (The accident analyses were performed at a NSSS power of 3650 MWth, including ~16 MWth net RCP heat addition and a calorimetric power uncertainty of
                     +0.6% RTP.)
For Cycle 13 of U1 and for Cycle 11 of U2, the RATED THERMAL POWER is 3458 MWth (100% RTP), and the core power should be reduced to 3411 MWth (98.6% RTP) if the LEFM is unavailable.
Surveillance Requirement SR 3.3.1.2 requires the performance of a comparison of the results of the calorimetric heat balance calculation to (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM              B 13.3-16                                  Revision 70

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TRB 13.3.34 BASES BACKGROUND         Nuclear Instrumentation System (NIS) and N-16 Power Monitor channel (continued)       output. SR 3.3.1.2 requires that the NIS Power Range channels be adjusted if the calorimetric heat balance calculation results exceed the NIS Power Range indication by more than +2% RTP, and the N-16 Power Monitor channels be adjusted if the calorimetric heat balance calculation results exceed the N-16 Power Monitor indication by more than +2% RTP.
SR 3.3.1.2 is required to be performed every 24 hours (daily). At that time, the NIS and N-16 power indications must be normalized to indicate within at least +2% RTP of the calorimetric measurement. The plant may then be run for the next 24 hour period, using these normalized NIS and N-16 power indications, such that the calorimetric power does not exceed 100% RTP. Although the calorimetric power indication may be monitored continuously for control of the unit power, the calorimetric power indication is not required to be consulted again until the daily calorimetric comparisons of the NIS and N-16 power indications are performed.
The following general guidance is provided for operation of CPSES Units 1 and 2:
: 1.      When the LEFM is available, the plant should be operated in a manner consistent with the LEFM-based calorimetric measurement and at 100% RTP.
: 2.      If the LEFM is unavailable, the plant may be operated at 100%
RTP using the NIS and N-16 power indications until the next performance of SR 3.3.1.2 is due.
: 3.      If the LEFM-based calorimetric measurement is unavailable at the time SR 3.3.1.2 is due, the feedwater venturi-based calorimetric measurement should be used for the performance of SR 3.3.1.2. However, to maintain consistency with the uncertainty analyses, the maximum allowable power should be reduced to 98.6% RTP. Either the NIS and N-16 power indications or the feedwater venturi-based calorimetric power indications may be used to control the unit power.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM              B 13.3-17                                  Revision 70

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TRB 13.3.34 BASES (continued)
APPLICABLE         The setpoints for those functions of the Reactor Protection System that SAFETY ANALYSES    are based on a percentage of power (i.e., the NIS, overpower N-16 and overtemperature N-16 trip functions) have been calculated based on analytical margins available at 100% RTP. Operation at lower power levels does not require these setpoints to be adjusted.
LCO                The LCO requires the LEFM to be used for the completion of the daily secondary plant calorimetric measurement required in SR 3.3.1.2. The use of the LEFM ensures that the basis for operation at 100% RATED THERMAL POWER is maintained.
APPLICABILITY      The requirement to use the LEFM for the performance of the secondary plant calorimetric measurement required by SR 3.3.1.2 is applicable to MODE 1 > 15% RTP.
ACTIONS            A.1 If the LEFM becomes unavailable during the intervals between performance of SR 3.3.1.2, plant operation may continue using the power indications from the NIS and N-16 systems. However, in order to remain in compliance with the bases for operation at 100% RATED THERMAL POWER, the LEFM must be returned to service prior to performance of SR 3.3.1.2.
B.1, B.2, and B.3 If the Required Action or Completion Time of Condition A is not met (i.e.,
the LEFM has not been returned to service prior to the performance of SR 3.3.1.2), Condition B is entered. Required Action B.1 requires that the reactor power be reduced to, or maintained at, a power level less than or equal to 98.6% RTP. This power reduction is performed prior to performing SR 3.3.1.2 in order to remain within the plants design bases immediately upon performance of SR 3.3.1.2.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM             B 13.3-18                                 Revision 70

Plant Calorimetric Measurement TRB 13.3.34 BASES ACTIONS            B.1, B.2, and B.3 (contiinued)
Required Action B.2 directs the performance of SR 3.3.1.2 using the feedwater venturi indications of feedwater flow. Once SR 3.3.1.2 is performed using the feedwater venturi indications of feedwater flow, the required power uncertainty is 2% RTP. In order to maintain compliance with the safety analyses, it is necessary to operate the plant at a maximum core thermal power of less than or equal to 98.6% RTP.
Required Action B.3 serves as a reminder that the core power is to be maintained at a value less than or equal to 98.6% RTP until the LEFM is returned to service and SR 3.3.1.2 has been performed using the LEFM indication of feedwater flow. Once SR 3.3.1.2 has been performed, then the plant can again be operated at RTP.
TECHNICAL          TRS 13.3.34.1 requires that the availability of the LEFM be verified prior REQUIREMENTS       to its use for the performance of SR 3.3.1.2. The self-diagnostics SURVEILLANCE       features of the LEFM should be used for this surveillance. If the LEFM indications are in the normal or alert status it is considered operable.
REFERENCES         1.       License Amendment Request 01-005, Increase the licensed power for operation of CPSES Units 1 and 2 to 3458 MWth, Docket Nos. 50-445 and 50-446, CPSES.
: 2.       License Amendment Request (LAR) 07-004, Revision to the Operating License and Technical Specifications 1.0, Use and Application and 3.7.17, Spent Fuel Assembly Storage to Revise Rated Thermal Power from 3458 MWth to 3612 MWth. Docket Nos. 50-445 and 50-446, CPSES.
: 3.       WCAP-16840-P, Rev. 0, Comanche Peak Nuclear Power Plant Stretch Power Uprate Licensing Report.
: 4.       License Amendment 146, Revison to the Operating License and Technical Specifications 1.0, Use and Application to Revise Rated Thermal Power from 3458 MWth to 3612 MWth. Docket Nos. 50-445 and 50-446, CPSES.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.3-19                                  Revision 70

RCS Pressure Isolation Valves TRB 13.4.14 B 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TRB 13.4.14 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Pressure Isolation Valves BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.4.14.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.4-1                               Revision 56

Loose Parts Detection System TRB 13.4.31 B 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TRB 13.4.31 Loose Parts Detection System BASES The OPERABILITY of the Loose-Part Detection System ensures that sufficient capability is available to detect loose metallic parts in the Reactor System and avoid or mitigate damage to Reactor System components. The allowable out-of-service times and surveillance requirements are consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.133, Loose-Part Detection Program for the Primary System of Light-Water-Cooled Reactors, May 1981.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.4-2                               Revision 56

RCS Chemistry TRB 13.4.33 B 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TRB 13.4.33 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Chemistry BASES The limitations on Reactor Coolant System chemistry ensure that corrosion of the Reactor Coolant System is minimized and reduces the potential for Reactor Coolant System leakage or failure due to stress corrosion. Maintaining the chemistry within the Steady-State Limits provides adequate corrosion protection to ensure the structural integrity of the Reactor Coolant System over the life of the plant. The associated effects of exceeding the oxygen, chloride, and fluoride limits are time and temperature dependent. Corrosion studies show that operation may be continued with contaminant concentration levels in excess of the Steady-State Limits, up to the Transient Limits, for the specified limited time intervals without having a significant effect on the structural integrity of the Reactor Coolant System. The time interval permitting continued operation within the restrictions of the Transient Limits provides time for taking corrective actions to restore the contaminant concentrations to within the Steady-State Limits.
The Surveillance Requirements provide adequate assurance that concentrations in excess of the limits will be detected in sufficient time to take corrective action.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                      B 13.4-3                                 Revision 56

Pressurizer TRB 13.4.34 B 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TRB 13.4.34 Pressurizer BASES The temperature and pressure changes during heatup and cooldown are limited to be consistent with the requirements given in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Appendix G and 10CFR50, Appendix G.
: a.      The pressurizer heatup and cooldown rates shall not exceed 100&#xba;F/h and 200&#xba;F/h, respectively.
: b.      System preservice hydrotests and in-service leak and hydrotests shall be performed at pressures in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI.
Although the pressurizer operates in temperature ranges above those for which there is reason for concern of nonductile failure, operating limits are provided to assure compatibility of operation with the fatigue analysis performed in accordance with the ASME Code requirements.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.4-4                                   Revision 56

RCS Vents Specification TRB 13.4.35 B 13.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM TRB 13.4.35 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Vents Specification BASES Reactor Coolant System vents are provided to exhaust noncondensible gases and/or steam from the Reactor Coolant System that could inhibit natural circulation core cooling. The OPERABILITY of at least one Reactor Coolant System vent path from the reactor vessel head, and the pressurizer steam space, ensures that the capability exists to perform this function.
The valve redundancy of the Reactor Coolant System vent paths serves to minimize the probability of inadvertent or irreversible actuation while ensuring that a single failure of a vent valve, power supply, or control system does not prevent isolation of the vent path.
The function, capabilities, and testing requirements of the Reactor Coolant System vents are consistent with the requirements of Item II.B.1 of NUREG-0737, Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements, November 1980.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.4-5                                   Revision 56

ECCS - Containment Debris TRB 13.5.31 B 13.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
TRB 13.5.31 ECCS - Containment Debris BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.5.2 and 3.5.3.
TRS 13.5.31.1 requires an inspection of accessible areas of containment to verify that no loose debris are present. For inspection purposes the definition of Accessible areas is clarified as follows. Areas which are physically restricted for the entire outage such as a bolted manway are considered not accessible for inspection purposes. Areas where access is restricted by a process control (e.g., RWP locked area) for the entire outage are considered not accessible for inspection purposes. It is the responsibility of the person(s) performing the close out inspections to verify whether or not the exception areas previously noted above have been accessed at any time during the outage.
Exception areas which have been accessed during the outage should have a close out debris inspection at the time access is once again restricted by either physical means or process controls. It is not necessary to re-inspect this exception area at the final close out inspection since an inspection was previously performed and access controlled.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.5-1                                    Revision 56

ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates TRB 13.5.31 B 13.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
TRB 13.5.31 ECCS - Pump Line Flow Rates BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.5.2 and 3.5.3.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.5-2                              Revision 56

Containment Isolation Valves TRB 13.6.3 B 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TRB 13.6.3 Containment Isolation Valves BASES The OPERABILITY of the containment isolation valves ensures that the containment atmosphere will be isolated from the outside environment in the event of a release of radioactive material to the containment atmosphere or pressurization of the containment and is consistent with the requirements of General Design Criteria 54 through 57 of 10CFR50, Appendix A. Containment isolation within the time limits specified for those isolation valves designed to close automatically ensures that the release of radioactive material to the environment will be consistent with the assumptions used in the analyses for a LOCA.
AIRLOCK VALVES CREDITED AS CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES The following discussion is provided to clarify the bases for the application of TS LCO 3.6.2 to the airlock valves so designated in TRM Table 13.6.3-1 that are also credited as Containment Isolation Valves.
These airlock penetration isolation valves are located in penetrations that are required to be closed during accident conditions and are included in the TRM table of Containment Isolation Valves for completeness. These valves are manual valves secured in their closed position except when open under administrative controls as provided in the TRM.
The designated airlock valves, including the airlock test connection isolation valves, are part of the airlock leak tight boundaries and directly affect the requirements for Containment Air Lock OPERABILITY as defined by the TS Bases. Therefore, they are subject to the controls of Specification 3.6.2. As such, the requirements of Specification 3.6.3 do not apply.
Both Note 6 and the corresponding statements applicable to the airlock test connections included in the Table Notation for the local vent, drain, and test connections (TVDs), provide that the airlock valves are included in the table of Containment Isolation Valves for completeness and that the requirements of Specification 3.6.3 do not apply. Instead, the airlock valves are considered an integral part of the airlock and are therefore subject to the controls of Specification 3.6.2.

==References:==
: 1)       Evaluation SE-90-222, approved 10/26/1990
: 2)       Evaluation SE-91-104, approved 11/13/1991 (Includes evaluation of Tech Spec Applicability to Airlock Valves)
: 3)       LDCR TR-90-010, approved 11/20/1991
: 4)       TUE Conference Memorandum TCO-91019, dated 6/10/1991
: 5)       EVAL-2004-003317-01, re: LCO applicability to airlock boundary penetration valves CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                      B 13.6-1                                 Revision 70

Containment Spray System TRB 13.6.6 B 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TRB 13.6.6 Containment Spray System BASES Related information is located in Technical Specification Bases 3.6.6.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.6-2                               Revision 70

Spray Additive System TRB 13.6.7 B 13.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS TRB 13.6.7 Spray Additive System BASES The performance test requirements for the Spray Additive System subject to SR 3.6.7.1 ensures that the available buffering agent is sufficient to ensure that the equilibrium containment sump pH is greater than or equal to 7.1.
TRS 13.6.7.1 This entails verifying the correct alignment of Spray Additive System manual, power operated, and automatic valves in the spray additive flow path provides assurance that the system is able to provide additive to the Containment Spray System in the event of a DBA. This performance test requirement does not apply to valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in position, since these valves were verified to be in the correct position prior to locking, sealing, or securing.
This performance test requirement does not require any testing or valve manipulation. Rather, it involves verification through a system walkdown (which may include the use of local or remote indicators), that those valves outside containment and capable of potentially being mispositioned are in the correct position.
TRS 13.6.7.2 To provide effective iodine removal, the containment spray must be an alkaline solution. Since the RWST contents are normally acidic, the volume of the spray additive tank must provide a sufficient volume of spray additive to adjust pH for all water injected. This performance test requirement is performed to verify the availability of sufficient NaOH solution in the Spray Additive System. The required volume may be verified using an indicated level bank of 91% to 94% for the Spray Additive Tank which corresponds to an analytical limit band of 4900 gallons to 5314 gallons, respectively, and includes a 3.36% measurement uncertainty. The 184 day Frequency was developed based on the low probability of an undetected change in tank volume occurring during the performance test requirement interval (the tank is isolated during normal unit operations). Tank level is also indicated and alarmed in the control room, so that there is high confidence that a substantial change in level would be detected.
TRS 13.6.7.3 This performance test requirement provides verification of the NaOH concentration in the spray additive tank and is sufficient to ensure that the spray solution being injected into containment is at the correct pH level. The 184 day Frequency is sufficient to ensure that the concentration level of NaOH in the spray additive tank remains within the established limits. This is based on the low likelihood of an uncontrolled change in concentration (the tank is normally isolated) and the probability that any substational variance in tank volume will be detected.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                     B 13.6-3                                  Revision 70

Spray Additive System TRB 13.6.7 BASES TRS 13.6.7.4 This performance test requirement provides verification that each automatic valve in the Spray Additive System flow path actuates to its correct position on a Containment Spray Actuation signal. This performance tests is not required for valves that are locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in the required position under administrative controls. The 18 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this test under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the performance test were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown that these components usually pass the performance test when performed at the 18 month Frequency. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
TRS 13.6.7.5 To ensure correct operation of the Spray Additive System, flow through the Spray Additive System eductors is verified once every 5 years. Flow of between 50 and 100 gpm through the eductor test loops (supplied from the RWST) simulates flow from the Chemical Additive Tank.
Due to the passive nature of the spray additive flow controls, the 5 year Frequency is sufficient to identify component degradation that may affect flow.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                    B 13.6-4                                 Revision 70

Steam Generator ARV - Air Accumulator Tank TRB 13.7.31 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.31 Steam Generator Atmospheric Relief Valve (ARV) - Air Accumulator Tank BASES Related requirements/information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.7.4.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                B 13.7-1                                 Revision 63

Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation TRB 13.7.32 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.32 Steam Generator Pressure / Temperature Limitation BASES The limitation on steam generator pressure and temperature ensures that the pressure-induced stresses in the steam generators do not exceed the maximum allowable fracture toughness stress limits. The limitations of 70&#xba;F and 200 psig are based on a steam generator RTNDT of 60&#xba;F and are sufficient to prevent brittle fracture. The pressure limit is applicable whenever the primary or secondary systems can be pressurized to the limit of 200 psig. For surveillance 13.7.32.1, the primary and secondary systems are considered no longer capable of being pressurized following depressurization to atmospheric conditions and when at least a 4 inch diameter vent path for the primary system and at least a 3 inch diameter vent path for the secondary system on the associated steam generator are established and administratively maintained (e.g., reactor vessel head removed for the primary system and all steam generator manways removed for the secondary system). If the primary and secondary vent path are being used to meet the LCO then surveillance 13.7.32.2 verifies the vent paths remain established.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.7-2                                  Revision 63

Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and SSI Dam TRB 13.7.33 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.33 Ultimate Heat Sink - Sediment and Safe Shutdown Impoundment (SSI) Dam BASES The limitations on the SSI Dam ensure that sufficient cooling capacity is available in the event of an SSE.
The limitation on average sediment depth is based on the possible excessive sediment buildup in the service water intake channel.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.7-3                                    Revision 63

Flood Protection TRB 13.7.34 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.34 Flood Protection BASES The limitation of flood protection ensures that facility protective actions will be taken in the event of flood conditions. The only credible flood condition that endangers safety related equipment is from water entry into the turbine building via the circulating water system from Squaw Creek Reservoir and then only if the level is above 778 feet Mean Sea Level. This corresponds to the elevation at which water could enter the electrical and control building endangering the safety chilled water system. The surveillance requirements are designed to implement level monitoring of Squaw Creek Reservoir should it reach an abnormally high level above 776 feet. The Limiting Condition for Operation is designed to implement flood protection, by ensuring no open flow path via the Circulating Water System exists, prior to reaching the postulated flood level.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.7-4                                     Revision 63

Snubbers TRB 13.7.35 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.35 Snubbers BASES All snubbers are required OPERABLE to ensure that the structural integrity of the Reactor Coolant System and all other safety-related systems is maintained during and following a seismic or other event initiating dynamic loads.
Snubbers are classified and grouped by design and manufacturer but not by size. For example, mechanical snubbers utilizing the same design features of the 2-kip, 10-kip and 100-kip capacity manufactured by Company A are of the same type. The same design mechanical snubbers manufactured by Company B for the purposes of this Technical Specification would be of a different type, as would hydraulic snubbers from either manufacturer.
A list of individual snubbers with detailed information of snubber location and size and of system affected shall be available at the plant in accordance with 10CFR50.71(c). The accessibility of each snubber shall be determined and approved by the Station Operation Review Committee (SORC). The determination shall be based upon the existing radiation levels and the expected time to perform a visual inspection in each snubber location as well as other factors associated with accessibility during plant operations (e.g., temperature, atmosphere, location, etc.), and the recommendations of Regulatory Guides 8.8 and 8.10. The addition or deletion of any hydraulic or mechanical snubber shall be made in accordance with 10CFR50.59.
Surveillance to demonstrate OPERABILITY is by performance of the requirements of an approved inservice inspection program.
Permanent or other exemptions from the surveillance program for individual snubbers may be granted by the Commission if a justifiable basis for exemption is presented and, if applicable, snubber life destructive testing was performed to qualify the snubbers for the applicable design conditions at either the completion of their fabrication or at a subsequent date. Snubbers so exempted shall be listed in the list of individual snubbers indicating the extent of the exemptions.
The service life of a snubber is established via manufacturer input and information through consideration of the snubber service conditions and associated installation and maintenance records (newly installed snubbers, seal replaced, spring replaced, in high radiation area, in high temperature area, etc.). The requirement to monitor the snubber service life is included to ensure that the snubbers periodically undergo a performance evaluation in view of their age and operating conditions. These records will provide statistical bases for future consideration of snubber service life.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.7-5                                  Revision 63

Area Temperature Monitoring TRB 13.7.36 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.36 Area Temperature Monitoring BASES The limitations on nominal area temperatures ensure that safety-related equipment will not be subjected to temperatures that would impact their environmental qualification temperatures.
Exposure to temperatures in excess of the maximum temperature for normal conditions for extended periods of time could reduce the qualified life or design life of that equipment.
Exposure to temperatures in excess of the maximum abnormal temperature could degrade the OPERABILITY of that equipment.
Normal and abnormal temperature limits for the following areas are assured by monitoring other areas with a correlated temperature relationship:
TEMPERATURE LIMIT (&deg;F)
Area                          Normal            Abnormal                    Area Monitored Conditions          Conditions CRDM Platform Barrier           140                149           General Area CRDM Shroud Exhaust (Unit 2 Only)
CRDM Air Handling Unit Inlet (Unit 1 Only)
Reactor Cavity                  135                175           Reactor Cavity Exhaust Detector Well R.C. Pipe Penetration           200                209           General Areas Reactor Cavity Exhaust (N-16                                                    Exhaust Detectors)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                 B 13.7-6                                    Revision 63

Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units TRB 13.7.37 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.37 Safety Chilled Water System - Electrical Switchgear Area Emergency Fan Coil Units BASES Related requirements/information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.7.19.
Inoperable electrical switchgear area emergency fan coil units should not require actions more severe than the loss of the entire associated Safety Chilled Water System Train. Therefore, where one or more electrical switchgear area electrical fan coil units are inoperable it is acceptable to declare the associated Safety Chilled Water System Train inoperable and enter Technical Specifications 3.7.19.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  B 13.7-7                                   Revision 63

Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit TRB 13.7.38 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.38 Main Feedwater Isolation Valve Pressure / Temperature Limit BASES The fracture toughness requirements are satisfied with a metal temperature of 90&#xba;F for the main feedwater isolation valve body and neck, therefore, these portions will be maintained at or above this temperature prior to pressurization of these valves above 675 psig. Minimum temperature limitations are imposed on the valve body and neck of main feedwater isolation valves HV-2134, HV-2135, HV-2136 and HV-2137. These valves do not need to be verified at or above 90&#xba;F when in MODES 4, 5, or 6 (except during special pressure testing) since Tavg < 350&#xba;F which corresponds to a pressure at the valves of 140-150 psig or less. The maximum pressurization during cold conditions (valve temperature < 90&#xba;F) should be limited to no more than 20% of the valve hydrostatic test pressure (3375 psig X 20% = 675 psig).
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.7-8                                Revision 63

Tornado Missile Shields TRB 13.7.39 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.39 Tornado Missile Shields BASES The purpose of tornado missile shields is to protect equipment from tornado generated missiles, and given the fact that adequate warning is available for tornado conditions, it is not necessary to consider protected equipment inoperable solely due to its missile shield being removed. This TRM provides conservative pre-planned allowances for control of missile shields without further consideration of equipment OPERABILITY. Removal of missile shields not contained herein, or exceeding the bounds of these allowances require additional assessment of equipment OPERABILITY. The conservative option to declare affected equipment inoperable and comply with the provisions of Technical Specifications is always available.
The following allowances have considered the impact on HVAC pressure boundaries, but do not address Security and Fire Protection requirements.
The capability to immediately re-install missile shields as used in the TRM allowances is deemed to exist when the necessary equipment to perform the installation is located on site and is available for use. Personnel necessary to operate the equipment shall be onsite and available when weather conditions exist such that a potential for a Tornado Watch or Warning exists. If weather conditions pose no immediate potential for adverse weather, then personnel associated with the operation of the equipment shall be available and within 90 minutes of the site. The shield shall also be in such condition and location to support reinstallation.
Removal and installation of missile shields shall be conducted in accordance with approved plant procedures.
Installation of each removed shield shall begin immediately upon the associated notification (Tornado Watch, Tornado Warning, etc.) otherwise the affected system(s) shall be declared inoperable.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.7-9                                    Revision 63

Tornado Missile Shields TRB 13.7.39 BASES DEFINITIONS*:
: 1. Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary - An established physical boundary, within the confines of the Fuel, Auxiliary and Safeguards buildings, which has been demonstrated via surveillance testing to provide the negative pressure envelope required by LCO 3.7.12.
: 2. Direct Communication - The condition of having a known flow path, from the building through the Primary Plant Ventilation Pressure Boundary into the negative pressure envelope, that does not contain barriers which have been proven to adequately maintain the negative pressure envelope required by LCO 3.7.12.
* These definitions are used with the confines of this TRM specification only.

==REFERENCE:==
TE-SE-90-615 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM                  B 13.7-10                              Revision 63

CST Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TRB 13.7.41 B 13.7 PLANT SYSTEMS TRB 13.7.41 Condensate Storage Tank (CST) Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves BASES BACKGROUND          The CST provides a safety grade source of water to the steam generators for removing decay and sensible heat from the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) to cool down the unit following all events in the accident analysis as discussed in the, FSAR Chapter 15. The CST provides a passive flow of water, by gravity, to the Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System (TS 3.7.5). The CST also provides makeup and surge capacity for secondary system inventory changes caused by different operational conditions, thermal effects, and the draining and recharging of any part of the system.
The CST is isolated from its non-safety-related users by automatically closing motor-operated valves in the make-up reject line when the motor-driven or turbine-driven auxiliary feedwater pumps start. The make-up and reject line tap is located above the safety related CST volume; therefore, closure is not a required safety function to prevent the outflow of CST water. The active safety function of the valves in the make-up and reject line is to prevent inflow which could adversely affect CST and AFW operability. The condensate make-up and reject line is also isolated by automatically closing motor operated valves HV-2484 and HV-2485 when the condensate storage tank reaches a HI-HI level.
Automatic closure of these isolation valves is required to protect the CST from overpressurization or damage to the floating diaphragm which could result from a condenser surge. Overpressure of the tank could lead to failure. Damage to the liner could lead to common mode failure of all AFW pumps.
The valves can also be operated manually from local control board switches.
A description of the CST is found in the FSAR Section 9.2.6.
APPLICABLE          The CST provides cooling water to remove decay heat and to cool down SAFETY ANALYSES     the unit during normal operation and following design bases events as discussed in the safety analyses in FSAR Chapters 3, 5, 6, 7, 9 and 15.
The CST make-up and reject line isolation valves ensure the availability of the cooling water supply by protecting the CST.
(continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM               B 13.7-11                                 Revision 63

CST Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TRB 13.7.41 BASES LCO                The LCO requires that two CST make-up and reject line isolation valves be OPERABLE to ensure that the valves function to protect the CST.
APPLICABILITY      In MODES 1, 2, and 3, the CST make-up and reject line isolation valves are required to be OPERABLE except when the CST make-up and reject line is isolated by a closed and de-activated isolation valve. When the CST make-up and reject line is isolated by a closed and de-activated isolation valve the safety function to protect the CST from overpressurization is already being met.
ACTIONS            A.1 and A.2 With one of the required make-up and reject line isolation valves inoperable in MODE 1, 2, or 3, except when the CST make-up and reject line is isolated by a closed and de-activated isolation valve, action must be taken to restore the valve to OPERABLE status or to isolate the make-up and reject flowpath within 72 hours and to verify the flowpath isolated every 31 days. The 72 hour Completion Time and 31 day surveillance interval are reasonable, based on capabilities afforded by the design with a redundant valve, time needed for repairs, and the low probability of a condenser surge occurring during this time period.
B.1 With both of the required make-up and reject line isolation valves inoperable in MODE 1, 2, or 3, except when the CST make-up and reject line is isolated by a closed and de-activated isolation valve, action must be taken to restore a make-up and reject line isolation valve to OPERABLE status within 4 hours or to isolate the make-up and reject flowpath. The 4 hour completion time is reasonable given the low probability of a condenser surge occurring during this time period.
C.1 and C.2 With the completion time of Condition A or B not met, a backup water supply must be determined to be available by administrative means within 4 hours and once every 12 hours thereafter. OPERABILITY of the backup water supply must include verification that the flow paths from the backup water supply to the AFW pumps are OPERABLE, and that the SSWS is Operable. In addition, each motor operated valve between the SSWS and each Operable AFW pump must be OPERABLE. If isolation of the makeup and reject line is not possible then both make-up and (continued)
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.7-12                                 Revision 63

CST Make-up and Reject Line Isolation Valves TRB 13.7.41 BASES ACTIONS            C.1 and C.2 (continued)
(continued) reject line isolation valves must be restored to OPERABLE status within 7 days, because the backup supply is not automatic. The 4 hour Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, to verify the OPERABILITY of the backup water supply. Additionally, verifying the backup water supply every 12 hours is adequate to ensure the backup water supply continues to be available. The 7 day Completion Time is reasonable, based on an OPERABLE backup water supply being available, and the low probability of an event occurring during this time period requiring the CST.
TECHNICAL          TRS 13.7.41.1 REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE       The surveillance requirement verifies the operability of the make-up and reject line valves and their actuation circuitry on an actual or simulated HI-HI CST level signal or an SI signal to ensure the protection of the CST and floating diaphragm from overpressurization.
TRS 13.7.41.2 The surveillance requirement verifies that a make-up and reject line isolation actuation signal is initiated on CST HI-HI level.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 -TRM               B 13.7-13                                  Revision 63

AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements)
TRB 13.8.31 B 13.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS TRB 13.8.31 AC Sources (Diesel Generator Requirements)
BASES Related requirements/information is located in Technical Specification Bases Section 3.8.1.
These surveillance requirements reflect normal design, maintenance or line-up activities/
descriptions rather than features specifically needed to successfully mitigate a DBA or design transient.
The diesels preventative maintenance program is commensurate for nuclear standby service, which takes into consideration the following factors: manufacturers recommendations, diesel owners groups recommendations, engine run time, equipment performance, calendar time, and plant preventative maintenance programs.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.8-1                                Revision 58

Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices TRB 13.8.32 B 13.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS TRB 13.8.32 Containment Penetration Conductor Overcurrent Protection Devices BASES Containment electrical penetrations and penetration conductors are protected by either deenergizing circuits not required during reactor operation or by demonstrating the OPERABILITY of primary and backup overcurrent protection circuit breakers during periodic surveillance. This is based on the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.63, Revision 2, July 1978, Electric Penetration Assemblies in Containment Structures for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants.
The Surveillance Requirements applicable to lower voltage circuit breakers provide assurance of breaker reliability by testing at least 10% of each manufacturer's brand of circuit breaker. Each manufacturer's molded case and metal case circuit breakers are grouped into representative samples which are then tested on a rotating basis to ensure that all breakers are tested. If a wide variety exists within any manufacturer's brand of circuit breakers, it is necessary to divide that manufacturer's breakers into groups and treat each group as a separate type of breaker for surveillance purposes.
All Class 1E motor-operated valves' motor starters are provided with thermal overload protection which is permanently bypassed and provides an alarm function only at Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station. Therefore, there are no OPERABILITY or Surveillance Requirements for these devices, since they will not prevent safety-related valves from performing their function (refer to Regulatory Guide 1.106, Thermal Overload Protection for Electric Motors on Motor Operated Valves, Revision 1, March 1977).
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.8-2                                  Revision 58

Decay Time TRB 13.9.31 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.31 Decay Time BASES The minimum required time for reactor subcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies within the reactor vessel ensures sufficient radioactive decay of those fission products that contribute to the radiological consequences of a postulated fuel handling accident.
Per Regulatory Guide 1.195, these fission products include xenon, krypton and iodine whose activity is assumed to be instantaneously released to the refueling cavity during the accident.
The fraction of iodine retained within the cavity is determined by the water depth above the damaged fuel assembly as specified in Technical Specifications LCO 3.9.7, Refueling Cavity Water Level. Retention of noble gases within the cavity is negligible. Release of fission products from the refueling cavity to the environment occurs over a 2-hour time period.
The required decay time and the water level requirement of Technical Specifications LCO 3.9.7 ensure the control room, exclusion area boundary, and low population zone dose limits of References 1, 3 and 4 are met following a fuel handling accident within contaiment. The assumptions for a fuel handling accident occurring within the fuel building are similar and the radiological consequences are equivalent. The required decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analysis (Ref. 5).
REFERENCES          1.      Regulatory Guide 1.195, May 2003
: 2.      Technical Specifications
: 3.      10CFR100
: 4.      Appendix A to 10CFR50, General Design Criteria 19
: 5.      FSAR Section 15.7.4 CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.9-1                                 Revision 66

Refueling Operations / Communications TRB 13.9.32 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.32 Refueling Operations / Communications BASES The requirement for communications capability ensures that refueling station personnel can be promptly informed of significant changes in the facility status or core reactivity conditions during CORE ALTERATIONS.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  B 13.9-2                                     Revision 66

Refueling Machine TRB 13.9.33 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.33 Refueling Machine BASES The OPERABILITY requirements for the refueling machine main hoist and auxiliary monorail hoist ensure that: (1) the main hoist will be used for movement of fuel assemblies, (2) the auxiliary monorail hoist will be used for latching, unlatching and movement of control rod drive shafts, (3) the main hoist has sufficient load capacity to lift a fuel assembly (with control rods),
(4) the auxiliary monorail hoist has sufficient load capacity to latch, unlatch and move the control rod drive shafts, and (5) the core internals and reactor vessel are protected from excessive lifting force in the event they are inadvertently engaged during lifting operations.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.9-3                                   Revision 66

Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas TRB 13.9.34 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.34 Refueling - Crane Travel - Spent Fuel Storage Areas BASES The restriction on movement of loads in excess of the nominal weight of a fuel and control rod assembly and associated handling tool over other fuel assemblies in a storage pool ensures that in the event this load is dropped: (1) the activity release will be limited to that contained in a single fuel assembly, and (2) any possible distortion of fuel in the storage racks will not result in a critical array. This assumption is consistent with the activity release assumed in the safety analyses.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.9-4                                     Revision 66

Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods TRB 13.9.35 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.35 Water Level, Reactor Vessel, Control Rods BASES The restrictions on minimum water level ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove 99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly. The minimum water depth is consistent with the assumptions of the safety analysis.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                B 13.9-5                                    Revision 66

Fuel Storage Area Water Level TRB 13.9.36 B 13.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS TRB 13.9.36 Fuel Storage Area Water Level BASES The requirement to suspend crane operations over the spent fuel pool in the event pool water level is < 23 feet provides for conservative plant operations consistent with the accident analysis.
The bounding design basis fuel handling accident in the spent fuel pool assumes 23 feet of water above the damaged fuel assembly in the spent fuel pool which mitigates the radiological consequences.
Crane operations that could adversely affect fuel stored in the spent fuel pool are controlled in accordance with plant procedures as analyzed in the review of heavy loads movements.
Administrative controls are employed to prevent the handling of loads that have a greater potential energy than those which have been analyzed. This Technical Requirement further ensures, for loads < 2150 pounds, that the water level is greater than that assumed in the analysis.

==REFERENCE:==
NRC Bulletin 96-02, Movement of Heavy Loads Over Spent Fuel, Over Fuel in the Reactor Core, or Over Safety-Related Equipment.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.9-6                                 Revision 66

Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation TRB 13.10.31 B 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TRB 13.10.31 Explosive Gas Monitoring Instrumentation BASES The explosive gas instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, the concentrations of potentially explosive gas mixtures in the WASTE GAS HOLDUP SYSTEM. The OPERABILITY and use of this instrumentation is consistent with the requirements of General Design Criteria 63, and 64 of 10 CFR 50, Appendix A.
One hydrogen and two oxygen monitors are required to be OPERABLE for the operating recombiner during WASTE GAS HOLDUP SYSTEM (WGHS) operation. The following discussion provides clarification of WGHS operation and degassing.
For the purpose of this specification, with no input gases allowed to the WGHS, recirculation of the WGHS as well as sampling, recirculation, storage, and discharge of a waste gas decay tank are not considered as WGHS operation.
Degassing operation (which is a type of WGHS operation) is defined as purging the RCS of residual gases during unit shutdown.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  B 13.10-1                                Revision 56

Gas Storage Tanks TRB 13.10.32 B 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TRB 13.10.32 Gas Storage Tanks BASES The tanks included in this specification are those tanks for which the quantity of radioactivity contained is not limited directly or indirectly by another Technical Specification. Restricting the quantity of radioactivity contained in each gas storage tank provides assurance that in the event of an uncontrolled release of the tank's contents, the resulting whole body exposure to a MEMBER OF THE PUBLIC at the nearest SITE BOUNDARY will not exceed 0.5 rem. This is consistent with Standard Review Plan 11.3, Branch Technical Position ETSB 11-5, Postulated Radioactive Releases Due to a Waste Gas System Leak or Failure, in NUREG-0800, July 1981.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                    B 13.10-2                                Revision 56

Liquid Holdup Tanks TRB 13.10.33 B 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TRB 13.10.33 Liquid Holdup Tanks BASES The tanks listed in this specification include all those unprotected outdoor tanks both permanent and temporary that are not surrounded by liners, dikes, or walls capable of holding the tank contents and that do not have tank overflows and surrounding area drains connected to the Liquid Radwaste Treatment System.
Restricting the quantity of radioactive material contained in the specified tanks provides assurance that in the event of an uncontrolled release of the tank's contents, the resulting concentrations would be less than the values given in Appendix B, Table 2, Column 2, to 10 CFR 20.1001 - 20.2402, at the nearest potable water supply and the nearest surface water supply in an UNRESTRICTED AREA.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                   B 13.10-3                                 Revision 56

Explosive Gas Mixture TRB 13.10.34 B 13.10 EXPLOSIVE GAS AND STORAGE TANK RADIOACTIVITY MONITORING PROGRAM TRB 13.10.34 Explosive Gas Mixture BASES This specification is provided to ensure that the concentration of potentially explosive gas mixtures contained in the WASTE GAS HOLDUP SYSTEM is maintained below the flammability limits of hydrogen and oxygen. Automatic control features are included in the system to prevent the hydrogen and oxygen concentrations from reaching these flammability limits. These automatic control features include isolation of the source of hydrogen and/or oxygen.
Maintaining the concentration of hydrogen and oxygen below their flammability limits provides assurance that the releases of radioactive materials will be controlled in conformance with the requirements of General Design Criterion 60 of 10CFR50 Appendix A.
CPSES - UNITS 1 AND 2 - TRM                  B 13.10-4                                  Revision 56}}